Home

Logic Pro 9 Control Surfaces Support

1. Touching fader selects track The Touching fader selects track preference of Logic Pro Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Preferences does not apply to the Euphonix devices when they are used with the EuCon protocol This function is offered by the individual devices using the device s Select channel by touching fader joystick or Select by Touch General preference This is the same as pressing the Select Sel key Euphonix Opening and Closing Plug in Windows Logic Pro supports the Euphonix Open plug ins on workstation when editing and Close plug ins on workstation when exiting preferences If the Link button is enabled in an open plug in window Open plug ins on workstation when editing does not open a new window when a new plug in is selected but replaces the open window s contents e Close plug ins on workstation when exiting does nothing If the Link button is disabled in an open plug in window Open plug ins on workstation when editing opens a new plug in window Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport 129 130 Close plug ins on workstation when exiting closes the plug in window Euphonix Getting to Know Knobsets When using the Euphonix devices with Logic Pro the Mixer s channel strip functions can be accessed and edited using knobsets A knobset contains pages each comprised of eight parameters K
2. 1to8 Shifts the fader bank a group of channels or parameters to the left by one bank 9 to 16 Shifts the fader bank to the right by one bank 17 to 24 Shifts the fader bank to the left by one channel 25 to 32 Shifts the fader bank to the right by one channel Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Software Navigation Section The following table outlines the software navigation controls and their assignments Control Assignment 1 Num LED off Num LED on Equivalent to 1 on computer keyboard 2 Num LED off Equivalent to Left Arrow key on computer keyboard Num LED on Equivalent to 2 on computer keyboard 3 Num LED off Equivalent to Up Arrow key on computer keyboard Num LED on Equivalent to 3 on computer keyboard 4 Num LED off Equivalent to Right Arrow key on computer keyboard Num LED on Equivalent to 4 on computer keyboard 5 Num LED off Performs Undo of most recent editing operation Num LED on Equivalent to 5 on computer keyboard 6 Num LED off Num LED on Equivalent to 6 on computer keyboard 7 Num LED off Copies the selection of regions or events Num LED on Equivalent to 7 on computer keyboard 8 Num LED off Equivalent to Down Arrow key on computer keyboard Num LED on Equivalent to 8 on computer keyboard 9 Num LED off Pastes the Clipboard contents Num LED on Equivalent to 9 on computer keyboard 0 Num LED off Saves the project Num LED on Equivalent to 0 on comput
3. CMD ALT FINE Effect Edit mode Shifts parameter display by one parameter Mackie HUI Function Keys The following table outlines the function keys and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Chapter 13 Mackie HUI 184 Control Modifier F1 Assignment Clears Overload LEDs SHIFT ADD Switches to Mixer view and displays MIDI channel strips CMD ALT FINE Opens or closes Arrange window F2 Recalls screenset 2 SHIFT ADD Switches to Mixer view and displays input channel strips CMD ALT FINE Opens or closes Mixer F3 Recalls screenset 3 SHIFT ADD Switches to Mixer view and displays audio channel strips SHIFT ADD Opens or closes Event List F4 Recalls screenset 4 SHIFT ADD Switches to Mixer view and displays instrument channel strips CMD ALT FINE Opens or closes Score Editor F5 Recalls screenset 5 SHIFT ADD Switches to Mixer view and displays aux channel strips CMD ALT FINE Opens or closes Hyper Editor F6 Recalls screenset 6 SHIFT ADD Switches to Mixer view and displays bus channel strips CMD ALT FINE Opens or closes Piano Roll Editor F7 Switches counter display format between SMPTE and bars beats divisions ticks SHIFT ADD Switches to Mixer view and displays the master and output channel strips CMD ALT FINE Opens or cl
4. F KEY Sets left cycle locator at the current playhead position OUT Sets punch out locator at the current playhead position SHIFT Moves playhead to right cycle locator position F KEY Sets right cycle locator at the current playhead position SHIFT Modifier key used to switch the function of other controls see SHIFT entries in left column REW Shuttles backward 240 Chapter 19 Tascam US 2400 Control Modifier SHIFT Assignment Identical to but independent of Left Arrow key on computer keyboard F FWD Shuttles forward SHIFT Identical to but independent of Right Arrow key on computer keyboard STOP Stops playback SHIFT Identical to but independent of Down Arrow key on computer keyboard PLAY Starts playback SHIFT Identical to but independent of Up Arrow key on computer keyboard RECORD Enables disables recording Chapter 19 Tascam US 2400 241 Tascam US 428 and US 224 20 This chapter describes how to use your Tascam US 428 and Tascam US 224 with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Tascam US 428 or US 224 p 243 Tascam US 428 and US 224 Assignment Overview p 243 Setting Up Your Tascam US 428 or US 224 This section outlines the steps required to use your Tascam US 428 or US 224 control surface with Logic Pro To set up your Tascam US 428 or US 224 device
5. SHIFT Locate mode 1 to 9 Moves playhead to marker 10 to 18 positions 0 Deletes marker at playhead position Shortcut mode 1 Performs Save As 2 Performs Redo reverses last Undo operation 3 Cuts selection 4 Pastes the Clipboard contents Screenset mode 1 Opens Closes Arrange window 2 Opens Closes Mixer 3 Opens Closes Event Editor 4 Opens Closes Score Editor 5 Opens Closes Hyper Editor 6 Opens Closes Piano Roll Editor 7 Opens Closes Transport window 8 Opens Closes Audio Bin window 9 Opens Closes Sample Editor Chapter 17 Roland Sl 24 Roland SI 24 Transport Section The following table outlines the transport controls and their assignments Control Assignment PAUSE Pause REW Rewinds playhead in one bar increments F FWD Advances playhead by one bar STOP Stops playback PLAY Starts playback RECORD Starts recording Jog Wheel Scrub mode off Moves playhead in one bar increments Scrub mode on Scrubs audio and MIDI Chapter 17 Roland S 24 221 Tascam FW 1884 18 This chapter describes how the Tascam FW 1884 the FE 8 extension and the FW 1082 are used to control Logic Pro The Tascam FE 8 extension can be used to expand the FW 1884 with eight additional channel strips Up to 15 FE 8 units can be added to the FW 1884 system The Tascam FW 1082 is a stripped down version of the FW 1884 Note This is an addend
6. write Switches automation mode to Write ALL Switches automation mode of all channels to Write SHIFT fnctB Switches automation mode to Read ALL SHIFT fnctA Switches automation mode of all channels to Read burn Switches automation mode to Touch ALL Switches automation mode of all channels to Touch SHIFT fnctC Switches automation mode to Off ALL SHIFT fnctA Switches automation mode of all channels to Off Note In modal dialogs the Burn buttons generate the computer keyboard character shown on the button face CM Labs Motormix SOLO Buttons These buttons switch the Solo status of the displayed channel Note In modal dialogs the SOLO buttons generate the computer keyboard character shown on the button face CM Labs Motormix MUTE Buttons These buttons switch the Mute status of the displayed channel Note In modal dialogs the MUTE buttons generate the computer keyboard character shown on the button face CM Labs Motormix VIEW Section The following table outlines the view controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Chapter 6 CM Labs Motormix Control Modifier Left right buttons Assignment In Effect and Instrument Plug in Edit modes shifts the parameter bank In other modes If BANK LED is off shifts the fad
7. F3 Recall screenset 3 SHIFT Open or close Event Editor CMD ALT Paste TRACK Switch to Mixer view Channel Strip mode PAN SURROUND Switch to Mixer view Pan surround LFE EQ Switch to Mixer view Frequency SEND Switch to Mixer view Position MARKER Delete marker NUDGE Nudge value Beat In modal dialog F3 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 3 key F4 Recall screenset 4 SHIFT Open or close Score Editor CMD ALT Clear TRACK Switch to Mixer view Input PAN SURROUND Switch to Mixer view Pan surround mode EQ Switch to Mixer view Gain SEND Switch to Mixer view Mute NUDGE Nudge value Bar In modal dialog F4 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 4 key F5 Recall screenset 5 SHIFT Open or close Hyper Editor CMD ALT Select All TRACK Switch to Mixer view Output PAN SURROUND Switch to Channel view EQ Switch to Mixer view Q Factor SEND Switch to Channel view NUDGE Nudge value Frame In modal dialog F5 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 5 key F6 Recall screenset 6 SHIFT Open or close Piano Roll Editor CMD ALT Select All Following TRACK Switch to Mixer view Automation PAN SURROUND Switch to Angle Diversity view EQ Switch to Channel view 106 Chapter 3 Mackie Control Button Modifier Function Comments SEND Switch to Channel Strip 2 view NUDGE Nudge value 1 2 Frame In modal dialog F6 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 6 key F7 Recall screenset 7
8. SHIFT Open Close Transport window CMD ALT Select Similar Regions events TRACK Switch to Mixer view Displayed parameter PAN SURROUND Switch to Surround X Y view EQ Switch to Frequency Gain Mixer view SEND Switch to Destination Level Mixer view In modal dialog F7 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 7 key F8 Close topmost floating window SHIFT Open or close Audio Bin CMD ALT Select Inside Locators TRACK Switch to Channel Strip Setup view EQ Switch to Frequency Gain Channel view SEND Switch to Destination Level Channel view In modal dialog F8 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 8 key Mackie Control GLOBAL VIEW Buttons The following table outlines the global view controls and their functions Button Modifier Function Comments MIDI TRACKS Switch to All view and show MIDI tracks SHIFT Set to fader bank no 1 channel strips 1 to 8 for In modal dialog example MIDI TRACKS button is equivalent to computer keyboard 9 key INPUTS SHIFT Switch to All view and show input channel strips Set to fader bank no 2 channel strips 9 to 16 for example In modal dialog INPUTS button is equivalent to computer keyboard 0 key AUDIO TRACKS _ Switch to All view and show audio channel strips SHIFT Set to fader bank no 3 channel strips 17 to 24 for example Chapter 3 Mackie Control 107 Button Modifier Function Comments In modal dialog AUDIO
9. e Mackie Baby HUI Utility Section e Mackie Baby HUI Navigation Section e Mackie Baby HUI Transport Section Mackie Baby HUI Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note If SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment Rotary encoder Adjusts the parameter selected in the Encoder Assignment section Rotary encoder push Selects a channel strip button SHIFT Turns Record Enable button of selected channel on off Signal indicator Illuminates when a signal is present in the channel It also indicates channel selection SOLO Enables or disables Solo MUTE Enables or disables Mute Fader Adjusts volume Mackie Baby HUI Encoder Assignment Section The following table outlines the encoder assignment controls and their assignments Control Assignment PAN Assigns pan to rotary encoders SEND 1 Assigns Send 1 level to rotary encoders SEND 2 Assigns Send 2 level to rotary encoders SEND 3 Assigns Send 3 level to rotary encoders SEND 4 Assigns Send 4 level to rotary encoders Mackie Baby HUI Automation Section The following table outlines the automation controls and their assignments Note If SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Contro
10. e Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Transport Section e Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Channel Edit Mode Radikal Technologies SAC 2K LCDs and Encoders The following table outlines the LCDs and encoder controls and their assignments Control Assignment Left and middle LCDs Upper row displays the channel number when in a Mixer multichannel view mode The parameter name is shown when in a single Channel view mode Lower row shows the parameter value of the corresponding encoder the one directly below the display Level meters are shown to the right Right LCD Upper row displays the name of the parameter being edited with the corresponding encoder the one below Lower row displays the parameter value assigned to the encoder below the display The Master Output level meter is displayed at the far right Encoders Edit the corresponding parameter shown in the LCD Encoder push buttons Parameters with two values On Off Switches between the two values Parameters that access items plug in selection for example Confirms preselection At other times sets the parameter to its default value Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Mute Solo Assignment Switc
11. followed by two additional characters Second Character This character is used to define a type for the event label for example track Insert slot Send slot and so on Third Character This character is used to define a value for the chosen event label type such as the track number or name For example Send s translates as Send1 Send2 and so on The following table shows the possible meaning for the second character t Track r Surround s Send slot S Number of sends e EQ band E Number of EQs p Insert slot i Instrument Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 49 50 The following table shows the possible meaning for the third character Third character Meaning Number of above track number Send slot EQ band Insert slot n Name of above Name of parameter addressed by the assignment P Name of first parameter o Parameter offset counted from 1 O Maximum parameter offset counted from 1 b Parameter bank parameter offset bank size counted from 1 B Total number of banks parameter offset bank size counted from 1 Setting the Flip Group and Exclusive Parameters The following describes the use and options available for the Flip Group field and Exclusive checkbox in the Controller Assignment Parameter area at the top right of the Expert View window Flip Group Field Enter the same integer value for two assignments
12. you can move between banks pages of parameters See JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Cursor Section Chapter 8 JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk 155 Effect Edit Mode Press F9 to enter Effect Edit mode display shows P1 P9 The pots control the parameters of the effect in the currently selected Insert slot Note With SHIFT held down display shows b1 b9 you can switch between Insert slots and move between banks pages of parameters See JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Cursor Section JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment PAN SELECT TRACK Selects channel strip destination for the selected SELECT track SOLO Enables disables Solo LOCATE Moves playhead to markers 1 to 32 SHIFT LOCATE 17 Creates a new marker LOCATE 18 Creates a new marker without rounding LOCATE 19 Deletes the marker at the playhead position LOCATE 25 Opens the Marker List LOCATE 26 Opens the Marker Text window LOCATE 28 Sets locators by previous marker LOCATE 29 Sets locators by current marker LOCATE 30 Sets locators by next marker LOCATE 31 Moves playhead to previous marker LOCATE 32 Moves playhead to next marker MUTE Enables disables Mute F1 Automati
13. 102 Chapter 3 Mackie Control Control Modifier Function Comments Switch between pre post fader mode of send on selected channel strip MUTE button Activate deactivate Mute button of track s channel strip OPTION Disable Mute button for all channel strips In Mixer view SHIFT Activate deactivate mute bypass of the shown parameter In EQ Mixer view SHIFT Activate deactivate bypass of the current EQ band In EQ Frequency Gain view Activate deactivate bypass of selected EQ band In Send Mixer view SHIFT Activate deactivate bypass of selected send In Send Destination Level Mixer view Activate deactivate bypass of selected send In Send Destination Level Channel view Activate deactivate mute of send on selected channel strip In Plug in Mixer view SHIFT Activate deactivate bypass of plug in In Instrument Mixer view SHIFT Activate deactivate bypass of instrument SELECT button Select channel strip SHIFT Set channel strip volume to unity level 0 dB OPTION Creates a new track with the same assignment as the selected track and switches to Arrange view SHIFT OPTION Create a new track with the next channel strip following the selected track and switches to Arrange view Fader Adjust volume In Flip mode Duplicate Chapter 3 Mackie Control 103 104 Control Modifier Function
14. 73 74 Turning the V Pots changes the current pan surround parameter e The Surround Angle parameter rotates between 0 and 359 degrees avoiding any angle limits Pressing the button on a V Pot sets the parameter to its default value Cursor Left Cursor Right switches to the next or previous surround parameter The selected parameter appears briefly in the upper row of the LCD Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons Pan Surround Channel View Pan Surround Channel view allows you to edit all surround parameters for the selected channel strip The mode display shows Pn for Pan The upper LCD row shows the name of the channel strip and Pan Surround Control Action V Pot 1 Edits angle or pan on non surround channel strips V Pot 2 Edits diversity V Pot 3 Edits LFE level V Pot 4 Edits spread V Pot 5 Edits Surround X V Pot 6 Edits Surround Y Note The Angle Diversity and X Y pairs influence each other Only the Angle Diversity parameters are automated and recorded Alternate Mode Options Hold down the PAN SURROUND button to display a submenu on the LCD The V Pots and function keys allow you to make the following changes Control Action V Pot 1 or F1 Switches to Pan Surround Mixer view and selects Angle V Pot 2 or F2 Switches to Pan Surround Mixer view and selects Diversity V Pot 3 or F3 Switches to Pan Surround Mixer view
15. Also see descriptions of other buttons Performs an Undo of the last editing operation USER 4 Performs a Redo of the last Undo operation USER 5 Opens the Undo History window USER 5 Saves the project Performs Save As operation allowing you to save the project with a different name Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 291
16. Pan Modifier Assignment Switches to Mixer view multichannel pan editing Encoders 9 to 12 edit Pan Angle Diversity LFE and Spread of selected channel in Surround mode High HiMid LowMid Low Switches to Mixer view multichannel gain editing of a certain EQ band Encoders 9 to 12 edit Frequency Gain Q factor and On Off for the selected channel Pressing and releasing the button chooses a specific EQ band While held down you can use Encoder 9 to choose the EQ band that you want to edit bands 1 to 8 The button s LED is lit when in Mixer view Gain Editing mode of the selected channel EQ band e Low Band 3 first parametric EQ band LowMid Band 4 second parametric EQ band e HiMid Band 5 third parametric EQ band High Band 6 fourth parametric EQ band Snd Ins Switches the four Snd Ins 1 to 4 buttons between Send and Insert modes LED off Send mode e LED on Insert mode Chapter 15 Radikal Technologies SAC 2K 207 Control Modifier Snd Ins 1 to 4 Assignment If in Send mode switches to Mixer view multichannel send level editing of Sends 1 to 4 Encoders 9 to 12 edit Destination Level Pre Post and Mute of the selected channel You must confirm the send destination by pushing the Encoder 9 button While held down use Encoder 9 to select the desired Send number 1 to 8 The button s LED is lit when in Mixer view Send Level Editing mode of the selected channe
17. SAVE Saves the project OPTION ALL Performs Save As function allowing you to save the project with a different name EDIT MODE EDIT TOOL Selects the next tool While held down numerical buttons select a specific tool SHIFT ADD Shifts to alternate mode use for some buttons See descriptions of other buttons OPTION ALL While held down value change mode is set to relative This switches between a minimum default or maximum value for the edited parameter Also see description of other buttons CTRL CLUTCH While held down the Group Clutch is engaged All groups are disabled CMD ALT FINE While held down Value Change mode is set to Fine All value changes work at maximum resolution Also see descriptions of other buttons Mackie HUI Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Level meters Assignment Displays momentary and peak levels REC RDY Activates or deactivates the Record Enable button OPTION ALL Disables the Record Enable buttons of all channel strips Chapter 13 Mackie HUI 181 182 Control Modifier INSERT Assignment BYPASS button OFF see Insert Select mode in Mackie HUI ASSIGN Section selects channel strip for plug in selection BYPASS button O
18. SHIFT Change individual track zoom of current track ZOOM Switch between default cursor button behavior see above and Zoom mode SHIFT Switch between default cursor button behavior and permanently mimicking computer keyboard arrow keys Mackie Control Jog Scrub Wheel The following table outlines the Jog Scrub Wheel controls and their functions Control Modifier Function Jog Wheel Move the playhead forward or back CYCLE Set the left locator to the current playhead position advance the playhead as normal then set the right locator to the playhead position Further Jog Wheel turns while still holding down CYCLE advances the playhead and sets the right locator again Tip Rotating the Jog Wheel counterclockwise while holding down CYCLE defines a skip cycle range DROP Set the punch in locator to the current playhead position advance the playhead as normal then set the punch out locator to the playhead position Further Jog Wheel turns while still holding down DROP advances the playhead and sets the punch out locator again SCRUB button Activate deactivate Scrub mode SHIFT Enable Shuttle mode on the Jog Wheel SCRUB button LED flashes 112 Chapter 3 Mackie Control Mackie Control External Inputs The following table outlines the external input controls and their functions Input Modifier Function USER SWITCH A Play Stop USER SWITCH B Record EXTERNAL CONTROL Master
19. Select Button Pressing a channel Select button selects the channel for channel based editing or assignment commands When a channel is selected Sel is lit on the button Note If the Track Info button is illuminated the Select buttons behave differently See Track Info Button for details Record Enable Button Pressing a channel Record Enable button denoted by a centered white dot arms the associated channel strip for recording When a channel is armed for recording the dot is lit Pressing the Record Enable button a second time disables recording for the channel To disarm all channel strips hold down the Option button while pressing the Record Enable button of any channel Mute Button Pressing a channel strip Mute button denoted by a speaker icon mutes the channel The speaker icon is lit when the channel strip is muted Pressing the Mute button a second time unmutes the channel strip To unmute all channel strips hold down the Option button and press the Mute button of any channel Solo Button Pressing a channel strip Solo button denoted by a headphone icon solos the associated channel strip in the application The headphone icon is lit when the channel strip is soloed Pressing the Solo button a second time exits Solo mode for the channel strip To hear unsolo all channel strips hold down the Option button and press the Solo button of any channel Rotary Encoder Each channel features a rotary encoder locat
20. Yamaha 02R96 FADER MODE Section The following table outlines the FADER MODE controls and their assignments Control Assignment FADER Enables disables Flip mode AUX MTRX Enables disables Flip mode Yamaha 02R96 EFFECT PLUG IN Section The following table outlines the EFFECT PLUG IN controls and their assignments Display Opens or closes the Sample Editor PLUG INS Switches SEL buttons and encoder buttons between normal behavior and setting a parameter s default value CHANNEL INSERTS Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons e Indicator off SEL button used for channel strip selection Indicator on SEL button used for Insert selection 2 Switches the display between track name parameter name and parameter name parameter value modes 3 Switches the bypass state of plug in currently being edited 4 Switches between Plug in Assign and Plug in Edit modes Parameter Up amp Parameter Down Plug in Edit mode shifts the parameter display to show the next previous page of parameter controls usually four for the selected plug in Chapter 22 Yamaha 02R96 261 262 Control Assignment Selecting virtual encoders 1to4 Pan Assignment mode Use cursor keys and then press Parameter control 1 button centers pan or surround angle ENTER button Parameter control 2 button centers surround diversity Parameter control 3 button resets surround LFE level Parameter control 4 button re
21. place them in the folders described above or as advised in the documentation supplied with the plug in About Software and Firmware Most control surfaces depend on Logic Pro for their functionality and cannot be operated if Logic Pro is not running They do not provide any additional functionality that is not available in Logic Pro itself One advantage of this approach is that as new functions are added to Logic Pro or as you create new assignments your control surface will be able to access and control them Most control surface units do include a form of software called firmware Firmware is similar to the low level boot software found in your computer mobile phone iPod and so on New behaviors such as improved control of motorized faders and changes to the display can be provided by firmware updates You should periodically check the manufacturer s website for your device to check for updates that may enhance use or performance The firmware is usually stored on an EEPROM Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory chip It can often be updated via a simple MIDI dump procedure in the form of a MIDI file Should new firmware become available you can simply download the appropriate MIDI file and play it from Logic Pro to your control surfaces which will be updated accordingly The steps required to perform a firmware update will be outlined in the documentation that accompanies the MIDI file Read this before attemp
22. AUX 6 Switches SEL buttons and encoder buttons between normal behavior and setting a parameter s default value When the AUX 6 button is held down Pressing a channel strip s SEL button resets the channel strip s volume level Pressing a channel strip s encoder button resets the channel strip s pan surround value PAN also needs to be selected in the ENCODER MODE section AUX 8 Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons when the STEREO section AUTO button is off AUX 8 indicator off SEL button used for channel strip selection AUX 8 indicator on SEL button used for Insert selection Yamaha DM1000 ENCODER MODE Section The following table outlines the ENCODER MODE controls and their assignments Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 Control Assignment PAN Assigns pan surround control to encoders In Insert Display mode assigns pan surround parameters of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders In Channel Display mode assigns pan surround parameters of the 16 channel strips in current bank selection to virtual encoders AUX Assigns Send level control to encoders In Insert Display mode assigns Send level parameter of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders In Channel Display mode assigns Send level parameters of the 16 channel strips in current bank selection to virtual encoders Yamaha DM1000 FADER MODE Section The following table outlines the FADER MODE control and its
23. Control Action V Pot 1 Edits the channel strip format mono stereo left right surround V Pot 2 Edits the Spread parameter V Pot 3 Selects the channel strip input assignment Confirm by pressing V Pot 6 V Pot 4 Selects the channel strip output assignment Confirm by pressing V Pot 7 V Pot 5 Edits the automation mode V Pot 6 Edits group membership You can only choose one group or Off To make a channel strip a member of multiple groups use Group Edit mode Mackie Control PAN SURROUND Button Pressing the PAN SURROUND button activates Pan Surround Mixer view Press the button repeatedly to switch between Pan Surround Mixer and Pan Surround Channel views Pan Surround Mixer View Pan Surround Mixer view allows you to edit one pan surround parameter for all channel strips Angle or Pan on non surround channel strips Diversity LFE Spread on surround channel strips The parameter being edited is displayed briefly when switching to this mode Regardless of the selected and active surround parameter non surround channel strips always display the standard Pan control In a project containing both surround and non surround channel strips you can edit a specified surround parameter for surround channel strips while the V Pots of non surround channel strips edit pan position as usual The mode display shows Pn for Pan e The upper row of the LCD shows channel strip names Chapter 3 Mackie Control
24. Holding down the OPTION button while pressing the SELECT button of any channel creates a new track assigned to the same channel strip as the selected track and switches to Arrange view Holding down the SHIFT and OPTION buttons while pressing a channel s SELECT button creates a new track with the next channel strip the one following the selected track and switches to Arrange view Mackie Control Touch Sensitive Motorized Faders The motorized fader of each channel strip is generally used to control the channel level just like a volume fader on a mixing console You can however also assign the fader to control other parameters by using Flip mode Flip mode is activated by pressing the FLIP button just above the MASTER fader When Flip mode is activated you can control the parameter which is currently assigned to the channel s V Pot with the fader This allows more precise control of pans aux returns MIDI track parameters EQs effects software instrument or other channel parameters You can switch between channels being controlled with the eight faders by pressing one of the CHANNEL or FADER BANK buttons See Mackie Control C CHANNEL LEFT and CHANNEL RIGHT Buttons and Mackie Control BANK LEFT and BANK RIGHT B The behavior of the faders changes in different modes as outlined below In Flip mode Duplicates or swaps parameters with the V Pot on the same channel In Surround Angle Diversity view Adjusts
25. The upper LCD line shows the marker name the lower line displays INSIDE when the playhead falls within marker boundaries e V Select 31 creates a new marker e V Select 32 deletes the current marker Mackie C4 Track Overlay Mode The Track overlay is active when the TRACK button light is on To select a track channel for Split Upper Press V Select 1 to 32 When a track channel is selected for Split Upper the bottom LCD displays the word UPPER BANK Left BANK Right shifts the fader bank by the number of channels in the control surface group SINGLE Left SINGLE Right shifts the fader bank by one channel To select a track channel for Split Lower Press V Select 1 to 32 If a track channel is selected for Split Lower the word LOWER is shown in the bottom LCD BANK Left BANK Right shifts the fader bank by the number of channels in the control surface group SINGLE Left SINGLE Right shifts the fader bank by one channel Mackie C4 Channel Strip Overlay Mode The channel strip overlay is active when the CHAN STRIP button light is on V Pot V Select row 1 V Pots 1 to 8 edits the frequency and gain of EQ bands 3 to 6 the parametric bands provided an EQ effect is inserted in the current channel strip e V Pot V Select row 2 V Pots 9 to 16 switches to Effect Edit mode for Inserts 1 to 8 provided an effect is inserted in the respective Insert slot If no effect is inserted turn the respective V Pot to select an effect then pre
26. When using the Arrow buttons to switch between groups of channel strips the channel strips follow groupings of eight starting from channel strip 1 unless the last group of channel strips do not make a complete group of eight For example if a project has 19 channel strips and the iControl is controlling channel strips 1 to 8 e Pressing the Arrow Up button shifts to channel strips 9 to 16 Pressing the Arrow Up button again shifts to channel strips 12 to 19 e Pressing the Arrow Down button shifts back to channel strips 9 to 16 not 4 to 11 Pressing the Arrow Up button while holding down the Option button jumps to the first eight channel strips in the project Similarly pressing the Option and Arrow Down buttons jumps to the last eight channel strips in the project For example if a project has 64 channel strips pressing Option Arrow Up jumps to channel strips 57 to 64 and pressing Option Arrow Down jumps to channel strips 1 to 8 Note If the Generator EQ Effect 1 or Effect 2 button is lit the functionality of the Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons are as described in the Generator Effect 1 and Effect 2 sections See M Audio iControl Assignment Buttons for details M Audio iControl Channel Strip Controls The right side of the iControl features eight rows of controls that you can use to edit channel strips Each row includes Select Record Enable Mute and Solo buttons plus a rotary encoder Chapter 4 M Audio iControl
27. adjust left locator adjust right locator move punch locators adjust punch in or punch out locator move markers adjust marker lengths nudge selected regions or events left right pan surround X and front back pan surround Y Project gt Markers All markers defined in the open project are shown as a list which only appears once you create the first marker in that project Assigning a Soft Key to a marker displays the marker title on the Soft Key but only if the marker title consists of six characters or fewer A marker name with more than six characters is replaced on the Soft Key by the marker number 1 for example With this same limitation renaming a marker in Logic Pro also changes the associated Soft Key display Pressing the Soft Key moves the playhead to the marker start point The Soft Key is illuminated while the playhead is within the marker boundaries Moving a marker disconnects the Soft Key from the marker Note Marker Soft Keys are a part of the Application Set not the project Don t forget to save the User Set after defining a Marker Soft Key Transport All transport related key commands are found here Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport 127 128 Euphonix Choosing Automation Modes The Euphonix devices only support Read and Write automation modes Logic Pro however also features Touch and Latch automation modes When you use the Euphonix devices with Logic Pro
28. default or maximum value Arrow Up Arrow Down Shift fader bank left right by number of channel strips Option Shift fader bank to first or last group of channels in the project M Audio iControl Channel Strip Controls and Functions The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their functions iControl Modifier Function Comments Encoder Modifies currently selected parameter Option Sets parameter to minimum default or maximum value Record Enable Activates deactivates Record Enable button of channel strip Chapter 4 M Audio iControl iControl Modifier Function Comments Option Disables Record Enable buttons of all channel strips Solo Activates deactivates Solo button of channel strip Option Disables Solo buttons of all channel strips Mute Activates deactivates Mute button of channel strip Option Disables Mute buttons of all channel strips Sel Selects channel strip except in Channel view M Audio iControl Jog Wheel Controls and Functions The following table outlines the Jog Wheel controls and their functions iControl Modifier Function Comments Jog Wheel Moves playhead Cycle Sets the left locator to the current playhead position advances the playhead as usual then sets the right locator to the new playhead position Further Jog Wheel turns to the right while holding down the Cycle button advances the playhead and resets the right loca
29. shown in the display The remaining encoders are inactive Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Using more than one encoder per parameter shows fewer parameters at any given time but you gain space on the LCD to cater to longer parameter names and values The more control surfaces you have within a control surface group the more you benefit from this feature Only when all parameters fit in one page checkbox When selected the defined number of encoders are only used when there are sufficient encoders available to show all parameters without changing pages For example if you have a Mackie Control and two Mackie Control XTs giving you at total of 24 encoders a plug in with 13 parameters will be shown with one encoder per parameter Eleven encoders will remain unused A plug in with 11 parameters will be shown with two encoders per parameter Two encoders will remain unused as will the inactive encoders of the subdivisions mentioned above When deselected multiple encoders are used for each parameter which may require scrolling This would not be the case if only one encoder were used for each parameter Show value units for checkboxes The two checkboxes in this section allow you to adjust whether parameter values are appended by the measurement unit where applicable Hz or for example You can set this option separately for instrument and plug in parameters and for volume and other channel strip para
30. Chooses the Text tool 22 Tool Xfade Chooses the Crossfade tool 23 Tool Marque Chooses the Marquee tool 24 Tool Autom Chooses the Automation Select tool V Pot 25 WfZoom Edits the Arrange waveform zoom factor if the Arrange window has key focus V Pot 26 V Zoom Edits the vertical zoom factor of the window with key focus V Pot 27 H Zoom Edits the horizontal zoom factor of the window with key focus V Pot 28 Move Cycle Moves the cycle locators V Pot 29 Quantz Chooses the Quantize value V Select 29 performs Quantize Selected Events for the selected regions or events V Pot 30 Division Chooses the division value for clock display V Select 31 Prev SetEXS Performs Next Plug in Setting or EXS Instrument key command V Select 32 Next SetEXS Performs Previous Plug in Setting or EXS Instrument key command Mackie C4 Modifier Buttons The four buttons in this area are similar to those found on your computer keyboard but are independent of the keyboard modifiers Many Logic Pro functions behave differently when one or more modifier keys are pressed in conjunction with another key or mouse click This also applies to the C4 control surface Here is a generic description of the modifier button functions SHIFT Switches other buttons to an alternate function OPTION While held down parameters are set to the minimum default or maximum value when edited with a V Pot CTRL Disables the Group functio
31. Depending on the NAME VALUE button the LCD display changes between the two modes in the following ways Name The upper LCD row shows the channel strip s name insert number plug in name current parameter page and total number of parameter pages The lower LCD row shows the name of the parameter which can be edited via the corresponding V Pot the one below the parameter name Value The upper LCD row shows the name of the parameter which can be edited via the corresponding V Pot The lower LCD row shows the current value of the parameter If there is sufficient onscreen space the unit type will be added for example Hz or dB Chapter 3 Mackie Control 81 82 Turning the V Pots changes parameter values Pressing a V Pot button sets the parameter to its default value except when the parameter only has two values on off for example In this case pressing the V Pot button switches between these values The Cursor Left Cursor Right buttons switch to the next or previous parameter page Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons When using the cursor buttons to switch between parameters the parameters change in groups of eight unless the parameters on the last page do not make a complete group of eight For example if a plug in has 19 parameters and the Mackie Control is controlling parameters 1 to 8 Pressing the Cursor Right button shifts to parameters 9 to 16 Pressi
32. Easy view with the Learn Mode button activated In most cases the name of the selected parameter is shown in the Parameter field Move the hardware controller you want to assign to the selected parameter Moving the controller sends a MIDI message to Logic Pro which appears in the Input message field This memorizes the controller assignment and you can click the Learn Mode button to complete the Learn process If you do not click the Learn Mode button Learn mode remains active allowing you to make further assignments To make another assignment select the parameter you want to assign in Logic Pro then move the controller on the control surface When you finish click the Learn Mode button or press Command L to complete the Learn process To assign a controller using a modifier key Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Learn Assignment for parameter name or press Command L to open the Controller Assignments window Hold down the modifier key you want to use Command for example as you select the parameter you want to assign while moving the control Click the Learn Mode button to complete the Learn process If Logic Pro receives a MIDI message from the device while you are holding down the modifier key the Learn Mode button is deactivated when you release the key and the Learn process is complete If you release the modifier key before Logic Pro receives a MIDI message the Learn Mode but
33. Erase settings the red W LED is lit The green LED is lit when a read automation mode is active Both LEDs are lit when Touch or Latch mode is active To choose an automation mode on MC Artist devices Press and hold down the Shift key Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport 2 Press the AUTO key repeatedly until your chosen automation mode appears on the display screen You can choose between e Blank Automation mode is Off Read r Activates Read mode in Logic Pro e Write w Activates Write mode in Logic Pro e Read Write rw Activates Touch mode in Logic Pro Euphonix Understanding the Fader Strips The number of fader strips differs across each of the Euphonix devices The following section outlines the behavior of some fader strip elements in Logic Pro Note This section is limited to descriptions of features specific to Logic Pro Refer to the Euphonix user documentation for information about basic fader behavior On key The On key provides the same function as the Mute button in Logic Pro but behaves in a way that may not be expected e The track is unmuted when the On key is lit the Logic Pro Mute button is unlit e The track is muted when the On key is unlit the Logic Pro Mute button is lit L LED On MC Professional devices when the Logic Pro channel strip being controlled by the fader belongs to an automation group the L LED of the channel strip is illuminated
34. HUI devices are connected bidirectionally with the computer using a MIDI interface Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup Choose New gt Install in the Setup window Select HUI in the Install window Click the Add button Select the added device in the Setup window then set the MIDI In and MIDI Out parameters as appropriate 177 178 Tips for Setting Up Other HUI Compatible Devices If the unit emulates a single HUI device proceed as if using a HUI If you experience problems in the DSP Edit display install the unit as a DM2000 See Yamaha DM2000 If the unit emulates more than one HUI add the required number of additional devices in the Setup window If the unit is limited to support of only one HUI DSP Edit section choose HUI Channel Strips only as the model name for these additional units This ensures that scrolling in the DSP Edit section is limited to four parameters If you want to know more about button assignments refer to Mackie HUI Assignment Overview and the user manual for the device Mackie HUI Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Mackie HUI interface elements to Logic functions Mackie HUI ASSIGN Section Mackie HUI Fader Bank Buttons Mackie HUI WINDOW Section Mackie HUI KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Section Mackie HUI Channel Strips Mackie HUI DSP EDIT ASSIGN Section Mackie HUI Function Keys Mackie HUI AUTO ENABLE Section Macki
35. If you have FE 8 extensions added a bank encompasses the total number of physical channel strips 16 24 and so on If no LED is lit bank 5 or higher is selected lt BANK Shifts fader bank down by one bank SHIFT Shifts fader bank down by one channel SET Switches to Mixer multichannel view driver version 1 20 or later required BANK gt Shifts fader bank up by one bank SHIFT Shifts fader bank up by one channel Chapter 18 Tascam FW 1884 Control Modifier SET Assignment Switches to Mixer view and shows all Aux and Output channels driver version 1 20 or later required lt lt LOCATE Goes to previous marker SET Deletes the current marker driver version 1 20 or later required LOCATE gt gt Goes to next marker SET Creates a new marker at the playhead position driver version 1 20 or later required NUDGE buttons Nudges the selected event region left or right by the current nudge value SET Chooses the current nudge value tick division denominator bar frame 1 2 frame SET Modifier for other buttons Moves playhead to left locator position SET Sets left locator at current playhead position SHIFT Sets punch in locator at current playhead position OUT Moves playhead to right locator position SET Sets right locator at current playhead position SHIFT Sets punch out
36. Instrument Channel view displays instruments 6 through 13 Mackie Control CHANNEL LEFT and CHANNEL RIGHT Buttons Using the CHANNEL LEFT and CHANNEL RIGHT buttons you can move up or down by a single channel strip Pressing the CHANNEL RIGHT button shifts the active channel strips up by a single channel strip while pressing CHANNEL LEFT shifts them down by a single channel strip For example if you are viewing channel strips 1 to 8 and press the CHANNEL RIGHT button channel strips 2 to 9 are displayed Notes on Using the FADER BANKS Buttons When holding down the OPTION button pressing the BANK or CHANNEL LEFT button jumps to the first set of channel strips in the project Pressing the BANK or CHANNEL RIGHT button jumps to the last set of channel strips in the project For example if your project has 64 channel strips pressing BANK or CHANNEL LEFT jumps to channel strips 1 through 8 and pressing BANK or CHANNEL RIGHT jumps to channel strips 57 through 64 For views where one type of channel strip is displayed such as audio instruments or busses Logic Pro remembers the last group of eight channel strips shown in the view and returns to it when you switch back from another view For example if you start in a view with audio channel strips 4 through 11 visible switch to an instruments view scroll to instruments 6 through 13 and then switch back to the audio channel view you will return to audio channel strips 4 through 11 not 6 thr
37. LEDs are lit when the pot has reached the current value The pots can operate in one of three modes with one sub mode in each Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Pan Send Mode Press F7 to enable Pan Send mode display shows PA In this mode the pots control the following channel parameters Control Assignment SEND A P1 Controls Send 1 level of selected channel SEND B P2 Controls Send 2 level of selected channel PAN P3 Controls pan of selected channel SEND C P4 Controls Send 3 level of selected channel SEND D P5 Controls Send 4 level of selected channel SEND E P6 Controls Send 5 level of selected channel While SHIFT is held down display shows AS the pots allow you to perform the following assignments Control Assignment SEND A P1 Assigns Send 1 destination bus for selected channel SEND B P2 Assigns Send 2 destination for selected channel PAN P3 Assigns input format of selected channel SEND C P4 Assigns Send 3 destination for selected channel SEND D P5 Assigns Send 4 destination for selected channel SEND E P6 Assigns Send 5 destination for selected channel Instrument Edit Mode Press F8 to enter Instrument Edit mode display shows In The pots control software instrument parameters Note With SHIFT held down display shows b1 b9
38. Mackie Control Button Modifier Function Comments NAME VALUE Switch between parameter name and parameter value display SHIFT Cycle through level meter displays vertical horizontal and off OPTION Switch between track name and track number name display CONTROL Clear clip overload flags CMD ALT Enter control surface group settings mode SMPTE BEATS Switch between SMPTE and beat format in clock display Mackie Control Channel Strip Controls 1 Through 8 The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their functions Control Modifier Function Comments Turning V Pot Modify parameter displayed in LCD OPTION Set parameter to minimum default or maximum value CMD ALT Modify parameter at high resolution Pressing V Pot button Set parameter displayed on LCD to default value or switch between two possible values Flashing preselection Enter the preselected value Menu options If track is folder Enter whatever option is visible in display Enter folder REC RDY button Activate deactivate Record Enable button of track OPTION Disable Record Enable button for all tracks SOLO button Activate deactivate Solo button of track s channel strip OPTION Disable Solo button for all channel strips In Send Destination Level Mixer view Switch pre post status of selected send In Send Destination Level Channel view
39. Moves the playhead forward by one bar STOP Stop PLAY Play RECORD Record LED is lit when active Chapter 10 JLCooper MCS3 165 Korg microKONTROL and 1 KONTROL49 This chapter describes how to use your Korg microKontrol and Kontrol49 with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 p 167 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Assignment Overview p 167 Setting Up Your Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Follow the steps below to use your control surface with Logic Pro To set up your control surface with Logic Pro Ensure that your control surfaces are connected to the computer via USB Open Logic Pro The devices are scanned for and installed automatically The microKONTROL KONTROL49 is automatically set to Native mode internal Scene settings are ignored Note If installation and identification fails it may be possible that the microKONTROL KONTROL49 reaction time is too slow due to USB bus power issues In this situation connect the supplied power adapter and set the power switch to the DC position When you quit Logic Pro or delete the control surface icon in the Control Surfaces Setup window the microKONTROL KONTROL49 is reset to normal not native operation Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 interface elements to Logic functions e Korg microKONTROL and K
40. Pot and fader assignments to the state they were in before you activated Flip or Swap mode Zero Mode Holding down the CONTROL button while pressing the FLIP button activates Zero mode In Zero mode the faders are set to the zero position and do not move This is useful in situations where the Mackie Control is located close to microphones and you want to make sure that you don t capture the mechanical noise of the faders moving When Zero mode is active pressing FLIP again reverts to Flip mode Holding down the CONTROL button while pressing FLIP turns off Zero mode and reactivates the faders Mackie Control Global View Button The GLOBAL VIEW button is used in conjunction with the buttons in the Global View zone These are discussed in Mackie Control Global View Zone Chapter 3 Mackie Control Mackie Control Function Key Zone The Function Key zone located below the Time display and the display buttons features eight function key buttons labeled F1 through F8 The eight function key buttons are assigned as follows Function key Action F1 to F8 Recalls screensets 1 through 8 Holding down the SHIFT button while pressing one of the function keys opens one of the following windows or closes it if currently open F1 Arrange window F2 Mixer F3 Event List F4 Score Editor F5 Hyper Editor F6 Piano Roll Editor F7 Transport window F8 Audio Bin Holding down the CMD ALT button while pressing o
41. Rewind Play Fast Forward and Cycle You can use these buttons to navigate your projects and to perform a number of recording and editing tasks Record Button Press the Record button denoted by a large white dot to activate recording on channel strips that are currently armed for recording See Record Enable Button Return to Zero Button Press the Return to Zero button denoted by a vertical line and left arrow to move the playhead to the beginning of the project Rewind Button Quickly press the Rewind button denoted by two left arrows to move the playhead backward by one bar Hold down the Rewind button to continuously move the playhead backward in one bar steps You can also press the Rewind and Cycle buttons simultaneously to activate Cycle mode and set the left cycle border left locator to the current playhead position Play Stop Button Press the Play button denoted by a right arrow to start playback from the current playhead position or to stop playback if the project is currently playing Chapter 4 M Audio iControl Fast Forward Button Quickly press the Fast Forward button denoted by two right arrows to move the playhead forward by one bar Hold down the Fast Forward button to continuously move the playhead forward in one bar increments You can also press the Fast Forward and Cycle buttons simultaneously to activate Cycle mode and set the right cycle border right locator to the current playhead position Cy
42. SELECT Section The following table outlines the AUX SELECT controls and their assignments Control Assignment AUX 1 Assigns Send 1 level to encoders and Send 1 to 4 levels to virtual encoders While held down the channel strip display shows the current Send 1 destination assignment AUX 2 Assigns Send 2 level to encoders and Send 1 to 4 levels to virtual encoders While held down the channel strip display shows the current Send 2 destination assignment AUX 3 Assigns Send 3 level to encoders and Send 1 to 4 levels to virtual encoders While held down the channel strip display shows the current Send 3 destination assignment AUX 4 Assigns Send 4 level to encoders and Send 1 to 4 levels to virtual encoders While held down the channel strip display shows the current Send 4 destination assignment AUX 5 Assigns Send 5 level to encoders and Send 5 to 8 levels to virtual encoders While held down the channel strip display shows the current Send 5 destination assignment 260 Chapter 22 Yamaha 02R96 Yamaha 02R96 ENCODER MODE Section The following table outlines the ENCODER MODE controls and their assignments Control Assignment PAN Assigns pan to encoders assigns selected channel strip s pan surround parameters to virtual encoders AUX Assigns Send 1 level to encoders and Send 1 to 4 levels to virtual encoders While held down the channel strip display shows the current Send 1 destination assignment
43. STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays 2 Press V Select 21 labeled Plugin Mixer Mackie C4 Effect Edit View Mode In Effect Edit view V Pots 1 to 32 constitute a group of 32 parameters Splitting is possible see SPLIT Button The SLOT UP SLOT DOWN buttons select the Insert slot BANK Left BANK Right shifts the edited parameters by one page In Split mode the SLOT and BANK button behaviors apply to Split Upper When holding down SHIFT the SLOT and BANK button behaviors apply to Split Lower SINGLE Left SINGLE Right shifts the edited parameters by 1 In Split mode the SINGLE button behaviors apply to Split Upper e When holding down SHIFT the SINGLE button behaviors apply to Split Lower To access Effect Edit view 1 Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays 2 Press V Select 21 labeled Plugin Mixer 3 Insert or select an effect and the C4 will automatically switch to Effect Edit view Mackie C4 Instrument Assign Mixer View Mode In Instrument Assign Mixer view the C4 displays the Instrument slots of the selected instrument channels Turn a V Pot to select an instrument This action lets you browse through the software instruments listed in the Instrument Plug in menu shown in Logic Pro instrument channels Chapter 14 Mackie C4 Press the respective V Select to insert the chosen instrument This enters Inst
44. See Mackie Control V Pot REC RDY button and LED See Mackie Control REC RDY Button Signal LED See Mack SOLO button and LED See Mackie Control Solo LED MUTE button and LED See Mackie Control MUTE Button SELECT button and LED See Mackie Control SELECT Button Control Signal LED e Touch sensitive motorized fader See Mackie Control Touch Sensitive Motorized Faders Mackie Control V Pot The V Pot is a rotary encoder with an integrated button accessed by pressing down on the top of the encoder You can use the V Pot to adjust the channel s send level and pan balance in Channel view or to adjust effect or instrument plug in parameters The V Pot can also be used to scroll through and choose items such as plug ins software instruments and more from menus and to determine send destinations The faster you turn the V Pot the quicker it changes values scrolls through menus and so on The top of each V Pot has an integrated push button which typically sets a default parameter value if a parameter has more than two possible values or switches between two parameter values on off The button can also be used to activate a function you have selected with the V Pot For example you can turn the V Pot to scroll through a list of effect plug ins for one of the channel Insert slots Once the effect you want is displayed in the main LCD press the top of the V Pot to select and insert the effect and open the
45. Supported devices Mackie Control Manufacturer Mackie Notes The original Mackie Control hardware is similar to the Logic Control The front panel legend is different however You should request a Logic Control Lexan Overlay from Mackie As Logic Pro also recognizes the Mackie Control protocol you may use any firmware version If your unit has firmware version 1 02 or later you can freely use either the Logic Control or Mackie Control mode See Mackie Control Mackie Control Extender Mackie Mackie badged version of the Logic Control XT As Logic Pro also recognizes the Mackie Control protocol you may use any firmware version If you have firmware version 1 02 or later you can freely use either the Logic Control or Mackie Control mode See Mackie Control Mackie Control Universal Mackie A Mackie Control with Logic Control silk screening legend and firmware version 2 0 or later including HUI emulation As Logic Pro also recognizes the Mackie Control protocol you may use any firmware version If you have firmware version 1 02 or later you can freely use either the Logic Control or Mackie Control mode See Mackie Control MC MCS3 Euphonix JLCooper See Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport See JLCooper MCS3 microKONTROL Korg See Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Motormix CM Labs See CM Labs Motormix Radikal Technologies SAC 2
46. Surface Setup and Customizing Controller Assignments Once set up you can use the Mackie Control to control Logic Pro in the following ways or perhaps take an alternate approach that best meets your working preferences With your project open in the Arrange window select the channel strips you want to control by pressing the Fader Bank buttons on the Mackie Control See Mackie Control Fader Bank Zone for more information Select the parameters you want to edit and whether you want to edit multiple channels Mixer view or a single channel Channel view using the Assignment buttons See Mackie Control Assignment Zone for more information Start playback and move the playhead to the position where you want to work using the Mackie Control transport buttons and Jog Wheel See Mackie Control Transport Zone and Mackie Control Jog Scrub Wheel Zone for more information Edit the project with the channel strip controls See Mackie Control Channel Strip Controls for more information Mackie Control Display Zone The display zone located along the top of the Mackie Control features four displays Each shows different information e Main Liquid Crystal Display LCD e Assignment display Time display Solo LED Mackie Control Main Liquid Crystal Display LCD The main LCD is divided into eight sections or columns each with two lines of text Each section displays information for the channel strip controls directl
47. The number of devices that can be used simultaneously depends on the number of free ports of the appropriate type USB FireWire or other available on your system In a standard setup you can use a single control surface or one accompanied by one or more expansion devices You can also create contro surface groups as described in Creating Control Surface Groups Using multiple control surfaces allows you to control more tracks and channels effects and other parameters simultaneously For example the Mackie Control XT devices are basically identical to the channel strip section fader V Pot and LCD of the main Mackie Control unit The Mackie C4 features a number of V Pots but no faders You can add as many XT C4 or other control surface devices as you wish to your system provided that enough free MIDI In and Out or USB or other suitable ports are available Connecting Control Surfaces Logic Pro supports a variety of control surfaces that connect to your computer using FireWire USB and other connection protocols Be sure to check the type of connection that your device features and that it is supported by your computer Before connecting the device read the installation instructions included with it and install the latest version of any appropriate firmware or driver software if needed For more information refer to the documentation that came with the device Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Connecting FireWire and U
48. V Pot 8 or Mute 8 Mutes or unmutes Send 3 Track Shortcut Menu Hold the TRACK button to display the Track shortcut menu on the LCD When this menu is active the mode display shows t_ for Track shortcuts Press one of the V Pot or Function buttons to make the following changes Control Action V Pot 1 or F1 Switches to Mixer view and selects volume as the parameter edited by the V Pot V Pot 2 or F2 Switches to Mixer view and selects pan as the parameter edited by the V Pot V Pot 3 or F3 Switches to Mixer view and selects input format as the parameter edited by the V Pot V Pot 4 or F4 Switches to Mixer view and selects the input assignment as the parameter edited by the V Pot Chapter 3 Mackie Control Control Action V Pot 5 or F5 Switches to Mixer view and selects the output assignment as the parameter edited by the V Pot V Pot 6 or F6 Switches to Mixer view and selects the automation mode as the parameter edited by the V Pot V Pot 7 or F7 Switches to Mixer view switches Logic Pro to Arrange view and selects the automation parameter selected in the Arrange window V Pot 8 or F8 Switches to Channel Strip Setup view Channel Strip Setup View Hold the TRACK button to display the Track shortcut menu on the LCD and press V Pot 8 or press F8 to enter Channel Strip Setup view In this mode you can edit the following less frequently used parameters for the selected channel strip
49. Volume Chapter 3 Mackie Control 113 M Audio iControl 4 This chapter introduces you to using the M Audio iControl with Logic Pro Use of the iControl with Logic Pro simplifies work with GarageBand projects When you open a GarageBand project in Logic Pro you can edit it using the iControl in exactly the same manner as in GarageBand You can also take full advantage of the greater control editing and processing power afforded by Logic Pro Given the hugely expanded functionality of Logic Pro over GarageBand some iControl buttons may not be assigned as you might expect You can however easily reassign iControl buttons in the Controller Assignments window For more information see Customizing Controller Assignments This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your M Audio iControl p 115 Editing Plug in Parameters Using the M Audio iControl p 116 M Audio iControl Assignment Buttons p 116 M Audio iControl Arrow Up and Arrow Down Buttons p 118 M Audio iControl Channel Strip Controls p 118 M Audio iControl Mixer View and Channel View p 120 M Audio iControl Jog Wheel p 120 M Audio iControl Transport Controls p 120 M Audio iControl Using Locators and Cycle Mode p 121 M Audio iControl Master Fader p 121 M Audio iControl Assignment Overview p 122 Setting Up Your M Audio iControl When you connect the iControl to any of your computer s USB ports Logic Pro automatically dete
50. You use the Automation buttons in conjunction with the channel strip SELECT buttons as follows To set the automation mode for a channel Press the SELECT button on the channel strip that you want to automate Press the appropriate Automation mode button Move the channel strip s fader turn the V Pot or use the Solo or Mute button The automation modes are outlined below e READ OFF If no automation mode is active pressing the READ OFF button switches between Read mode and Off Read The fader reads follows any existing automation data but does not record any new automation data Off Automation is off The fader neither sends nor receives automation data Existing automation data is not changed The fader still adjusts the volume or pan position as usual when moved TOUCH Writes new data when the fader is touched or the V Pot is turned during playback Any existing automation data of the current fader type is replaced with new data for as long as the control is active while the fader is being touched or the V Pot is being turned Chapter 3 Mackie Control 89 90 LATCH Similar to Touch mode but the control remains active even when the fader is no longer being touched or the V Pot is not being turned When you release the fader the current fader value replaces all existing automation data for as long as the sequencer is in playback or record mode Press STOP to prevent existing automation data from be
51. above DAW SHIFT ADD Switches the Mixer to the All view displaying all channel strips that exist in your project The channel strips on your DM1000 device will also reflect the All Channel Strip View mode Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 275 Control Modifier DAW WIN MIX EDIT Assignment Switches between the Arrange window and the Mixer DAW CHANNEL Shifts channel strips by one channel strip to the left DAW CHANNEL Shifts channel strips by one channel strip to the right DAW CTRL CLUTCH While held down all groups are disabled DAW ALT FINE While held down Value Change mode is set to Fine value changes work at maximum resolution Also see description of other buttons DAW MONI STATUS DAW UNDO Performs an Undo of the last editing operation DAW SHIFT ADD Performs a Redo of the last Undo operation DAW OPTION ALL Opens the Undo History window DAW SAVE Saves the project DAW OPTION ALL Performs a Save As operation allowing you to save the project with a different name DAW WIN MEM LOC Opens or closes the Marker tab in the Lists area DAW EDIT TOOL Selects the next tool While held down numerical buttons select a specific tool DAW WIN INSERT Opens or closes the Sample Editor DAW REC RDY ALL Disables the Record Enable buttons of all channel strips DAW SCRUB Enables disables Scrub mode DAW SHUTTLE Enab
52. all controls on the Mackie Control return to their previous state Chapter 3 Mackie Control 93 94 After the default audio filename has been entered you can freely select and arm any audio channel strip and then press the RECORD button No alert messages and file save dialogs will appear onscreen Tip To minimize the appearance of the dialog save your project with Assets before you start recording Saving your project this way bypasses the need to define filenames and makes handling faster and easier when using Logic Pro with the Mackie Control Mackie Control Marker Button Pressing the MARKER button activates one of the three marker modes Small Marker mode Large Marker mode and Temporary Marker mode You can use these modes to create or delete markers and jump to markers in your project Note The Marker and Nudge modes are mutually exclusive activating one deactivates the other Small Marker Mode Pressing the MARKER button activates Small Marker mode In this mode pressing the FAST FWD or REWIND button moves the playhead to the next or previous marker Pressing the MARKER button again reverts to the default behavior of the FAST FWD and REWIND buttons See Mackie Control REWIND Button and Mackie Control FAST FWD Button Small Marker mode is useful if you want to jump to markers while using the V Pots for other purposes Large Marker Mode Pressing the MARKER button while holding down the SHIFT button displays three c
53. band 6 driver version 1 20 or later required HI MID Selects EQ band 5 SHIFT Selects EQ band 7 REC Switches the bypass state of EQ band 5 driver version 1 20 or later required 226 Chapter 18 Tascam FW 1884 Mode Modifier Assignment LOW MID Selects EQ band 4 SHIFT Selects EQ band 2 REC Switches the bypass state of EQ band 4 driver version 1 20 or later required LOW Selects EQ band 3 SHIFT Selects EQ band 1 REC Switches the bypass state of EQ band 3 driver version 1 20 or later required Encoders and Controls Section FW 1082 Only The three buttons at the bottom of this control surface section determine the mode of other controls EQ Pan mode The controls apply to a certain EQ band of the selected channel AUX 1 4 mode The controls apply to Sends 1 4 AUX 5 8 mode The controls apply to Sends 5 8 Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Mode REC Modifier Assignment While REC is held down the SEL buttons activate or deactivate Record Enable for the channel strip EQ GAIN AUX 1 5 EQ PAN mode edits the Gain of the currently selected EQ band AUX 1 4 mode controls Send 1 level AUX 5 8 mode controls Send 5 level SET Selects the channel strip input EQ FREQ AUX 2 6 EQ PAN mode edits the Frequency of the
54. but for Send 7 AUX 3 Same as AUX 1 but for Send 3 DAW SHIFT ADD Same as AUX 5 but for Send 8 AUX 4 Same as AUX 1 but for Send 4 AUX 5 In Insert Display mode Assigns Send 5 level of channel strips to encoders Assigns Send 5 level of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Assigns Sends 5 to 8 of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Use the ENTER button to switch the bypass state of Sends 5 to 8 In Channel Display mode Assigns Send 5 level of channel strips to encoders and virtual encoders Shows current Send 5 destination assignment when button is held down Chapter 21 Yamaha 01V96 251 252 Control Modifier Assignment AUX 6 Switches SEL buttons and encoder buttons between normal behavior and setting a parameter s default value When the AUX 6 button is held down Pressing a channel strip s SEL button resets the channel strip s volume level Pressing a channel strip s encoder button resets the channel strip s pan surround value PAN also needs to be selected in ENCODER MODE section AUX 7 Assigns Pan to encoders assigns selected channel strip s pan surround parameters to virtual encoders AUX 8 Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons AUX 8 indicator off SEL button used for channel strip selection AUX 8 indicator on SEL button used for Insert selection HOME Enables disables Flip mode Yamaha 01V96 Basic LCD Functions
55. channel strip has no impact on the channel strip being edited When you switch from On to Off the channel strip is also updated V POT 7 Switches the LCD display format Name The upper line of the LCD displays global info and the lower line displays parameter names Value The upper line of the LCD displays parameter names and the lower line displays parameter values Functionally this is identical to pressing the NAME VALUE button V POT 8 Switches the Clock display format Beats Clock is displayed in bars beats beat subdivisions and ticks SMPTE Clock is displayed in SMPTE format Functionally this is identical to pressing the SMPTE BEATS button Chapter 3 Mackie Control You can exit Control Surface Group Settings mode by pressing NAME VALUE or by entering one of the Marker or Nudge modes SMPTE BEATS Press the SMPTE BEATS button located just below the SMPTE BEATS LEDs to switch between the two time formats SMPTE time or beats For more information see Mackie Control Time Display Mackie Control Channel Strip Controls Directly below the main LCD display are eight sets of channel strip controls You can use these to control Logic Pro channel strip parameters plug in parameters and other Logic Pro functions Each channel strip of both the Mackie Control and XT units includes the following controls which are described in the following sections V Pot rotary encoder with button
56. channel strips on your DM1000 device will also reflect the All Channel Strip View Mode DAW WIN MIX EDIT Switches between the Arrange window and the Mixer 256 Chapter 21 Yamaha 01V96 Control Modifier DAW CHANNEL Assignment Shifts channel strips by one channel strip to the left DAW CHANNEL Shifts channel strips by one channel strip to the right DAW CTRL CLUTCH While held down all groups are disabled DAW ALT FINE While held down Value Change mode is set to Fine value changes work at maximum resolution Also see description of other buttons DAW MONI STATUS DAW UNDO Performs an Undo of the last editing operation DAW SHIFT ADD Performs a Redo of the last Undo operation DAW OPTION ALL Opens the Undo History window DAW SAVE Saves the project DAW OPTION ALL Performs a Save As operation allowing you to save the project with a different name DAW WIN MEM LOC Opens or closes the Marker tab in the Lists area DAW EDIT TOOL Selects the next tool While held down numerical buttons select a specific tool DAW WIN INSERT Opens or closes the Sample Editor DAW REC RDY ALL Disables the Record Enable buttons of all channel strips DAW SCRUB Enables disables Scrub mode DAW SHUTTLE Enables disables Shuttle mode DAW REW Shuttles backward DAW FF Shuttles forward DAW STOP Stop DAW PLAY Play DAW SHIFT ADD
57. currently selected parameter DAW SHUTTLE Switches the parameter wheel to Shuttle mode DAW SCRUB Switches the parameter wheel to Scrub mode DEC button Default exits folder In Go to Marker dialog cancels dialog DAW ALT FINE Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab in the Media area INC button Enters the selected folder Yamaha DM1000 Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 273 274 Control Modifier Assignment Encoder Adjusts parameter selected in the ENCODER MODE and AUX SELECT sections Encoder Select button Pan selected sets pan to center position Send 1 to 8 selected edits Send pre post position activates deactivates Send mute or sets Send level to default value Send Assign Input or Output selected confirms selection SEL If AUTO off AUX 8 off selects channel strip AUX 8 on selects channel strip for insert assignment If AUTO on Cycles through automation modes With an automation mode button held down sets this automation mode DAW SHIFT ADD Resets the volume level SOLO Enables disables t
58. currently selected EQ band AUX 1 4 mode controls Send 2 level AUX 5 8 mode controls Send 6 level SET Selects the channel strip output EQ Q AUX 3 7 EQ PAN mode edits the Q Factor of the currently selected EQ band AUX 1 4 mode controls Send 3 level AUX 5 8 mode controls Send 7 level SET Selects the channel strip input format Chapter 18 Tascam FW 1884 227 Mode PAN AUX 4 8 Modifier Assignment EQ PAN mode edits Pan AUX 1 4 mode controls Send 4 level AUX 5 8 mode controls Send 8 level EQ HI AUX 1 5 EQ PAN mode selects EQ band 6 AUX 1 4 mode switches Send 1 Mute on off AUX 5 8 mode switches Send 5 Mute on off SHIFT EQ PAN mode selects EQ band 8 AUX 1 4 mode switches Send 1 Position pre post AUX 5 8 mode switches Send 5 Position pre post REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 6 EQ HI MID AUX 2 6 EQ PAN mode selects EQ band 5 AUX 1 4 mode switches Send 2 Mute on off AUX 5 8 mode switches Send 6 Mute on off SHIFT EQ PAN mode selects EQ band 7 AUX 1 4 mode switches Send 2 Position pre post AUX 5 8 mode switches Send 6 Position pre post REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 5 EQ LO MID AUX 3 7 EQ PAN mode selects EQ band 4 AUX 1 4 mode switches Send 3 Mute on off AUX 5 8 mode switches Send 7 Mute on off SHIFT EQ PAN mode selects EQ b
59. edit instrument parameters lt Plug in name gt Encoders edit effect parameters the currently selected Insert slot number is indicated on the display Automatn Encoders set the automation mode Ins x SETTING held down Main encoder chooses the Insert slot number ModePad Displayed while SCENE button is held down Pan Encoders control pan Send x Encoders control send level of send x User 6 Channel Strip User Mode 6 Encoders are initially unassigned User 7 Channel Strip User Mode 7 Encoders are initially unassigned User 8 Channel Strip User Mode 8 Encoders are initially unassigned The LCD backlight is red while recording and green at other times The controls in the main section have the following meaning Control Assignment Main encoder Controls the playhead in one of three modes See Pads 1 3 in Transport Mode Chapter 11 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Control Assignment SETTING Held down in Send mode Main encoder chooses the current send Pads have special meaning see Send Mode LCDs display send destinations Encoders choose send destinations Held down in Effect Edit mode e Main encoder chooses the current Insert slot Pads have special meaning see Effect Edit Mode LCDs display effect names for all eight channels MESSAGE Enables disables Duplicate Flip mode When enabled both the faders and encoders control the parameter displayed in the LCDs SCENE W
60. indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control AUDITION PRE Modifier Assignment Sets left locator at current playhead position IN OUT Sets punch in locator at current playhead position Sets punch out locator at current playhead position POST Sets right locator at current playhead position RTZ Moves playhead to the left locator position END Moves playhead to the right locator position ON LINE Switches between internal and external sync LOOP Enables or disables Cycle mode QUICK PUNCH Enables or disables Autopunch mode REWIND Shuttles backward 188 Chapter 13 Mackie HUI Control Modifier Assignment FAST FWD Shuttles forward STOP Stops playback PLAY Starts playback SHIFT ADD Pauses playback or recording RECORD Record Mackie HUI Cursor Buttons The following table outlines the cursor controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment Cursor Up Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Up Arrow key Zoom mode zooms in vertically in the window with key focus SHIFT ADD Zoom mode individual track zoom zooms in CMD ALT FINE Page up OPTION ALL Scroll to top CMD ALT FINE Cursor Down
61. instrument Preselect the value by turning the V Pot fully counterclockwise Press the V Pot button Mackie Control does not switch to Instrument Edit view and no plug in window opens If a plug in window is open it closes Instrument Edit View You can view and edit instrument parameters in this mode The mode display shows In Depending on the state of the NAME VALUE button the LCD changes in the following ways Name The upper LCD row shows the channel strip name instrument name current parameter page and total number of parameter pages The lower LCD row shows the name of the parameter that can be edited with the V Pot directly below Chapter 3 Mackie Control 83 84 Value The upper LCD row shows the name of the parameter that can be edited with the V Pot below The lower LCD row shows the current value of the parameter being edited If there is sufficient space on the LCD row the unit type is shown after the value for example Hz or dB Turning a V Pot changes the corresponding parameter e Pressing a V Pot button sets the parameter to its default value except when the parameter only has two values on off for example In this case pressing the V Pot button switches between these values Compatibility Mackie Control can edit all instruments that can be automated regardless of the type of plug in you are using Logic Pro native TDM Audio Units Some third party manufacturer instrum
62. lit modes Editing Send Destinations You edit send destinations in Aux Sends mode using the Aux Sends knobset To edit a send destination Press the Aux or Sends knob top or key to display all send options for the currently selected channel strip Note If using the MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode The send options are displayed on the Soft Keys the touchscreen or the display depending on the system you are using Turn the respective knob to change the send level Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default level Press the Back key to return to the top level knobset Changing or Setting Send Destinations You change or set send destinations in Aux Sends Configuration mode using the Aux Sends Configuration knobset To change or set a send destination Press the Aux or Sends knob top or key Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport 135 136 Note If using the MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode Press both Page keys simultaneously to switch to Send Configuration mode The eight Send slots of the currently selected channel strip are displayed Select the Send slot you want by pressing the respective knob top The first eight send destinations are displayed You can use the Page keys to display further send destinations busses Choose the send destination Pressing the knob top changes or sets a selected destination e Pressing
63. locator at current playhead position REW As per Rewind key command FFWD STOP As per Forward key command Stops playback PLAY Starts playback REC As per Record key command Chapter 18 Tascam FW 1884 231 Tascam US 2400 19 This chapter describes how to use your Tascam US 2400 with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following e Setting Up Your Tascam US 2400 p 233 Tascam US 2400 Assignment Overview p 234 Setting Up Your Tascam US 2400 Follow the steps below to use your Tascam US 2400 with Logic Pro To set up the Tascam US 2400 for use with Logic Pro Make sure that your US 2400 control surfaces are connected to the computer via USB Ensure that the US 2400 is in Native mode Consult your US 2400 manual for more information on this setting Open Logic Pro Your control surfaces are scanned for and installed automatically 233 234 Using the US 2400 in Native or Mackie Control Emulation Mode The US 2400 is capable of running in both Native and Mackie Control emulation modes If the unit is set up in Mackie Control emulation mode and the native support plug in is installed in the Logic Pro program bundle Logic Pro will detect a US 2400 native control surface and a Mackie Control plus two Extender XT units If you want to run the US 2400 in Mackie Control mode you should remove the US 2400 plug in from the Logic Pro application bundle Logic Pro will then detec
64. modes encoders control the parameters of the active mode F KEY Ifyou are in Instrument Edit view CHAN button flashing pressing the F Key enters the Instrument Assignment view The encoders are used to choose an instrument plug in from the list of available software instrument plug ins If you are in Plug in Edit view PAN button flashing pressing the F Key enters the Plug in Assignment view The encoders are used to choose an effect plug in from the list of available effect plug ins Ifyou are in Send view AUX button LED flashes and press the F Key the encoders are used to assign the send destination SEL buttons SHIFT Selects tracks channels In Pan view sets volume to Unity 0 dB In Send views switches the Send mode pre post F KEY Activates deactivates Record Enable button of each channel SOLO buttons Enables disables Solo MUTE buttons Enables disables Mute In Send views with Flip mode enabled mutes unmutes the selected Send SHIFT In Send views mutes unmutes the selected Send Faders Controls the volume of each channel unless Duplicate or Swap Flip mode is active Tascam US 2400 Encoder Details In CHAN mode CHAN button on the encoders control these parameters on the selected channel Encoder 1 AUX 1 Controls Send 1 level Encoder 2 AUX 2 Controls Send 2 level Encoder 3 AUX 3 Controls Send 3 level Encoder 4 AUX 4 Contr
65. of Split Lower when editing a software instrument when Split mode is turned on The next instrument parameter is assigned to encoder 2 and so on Insert Slot Sets the current Insert slot number both for selecting a plug in in Plug in Channel Strip view and for editing its parameters The default is 1 which sets the first top plug in slot on each channel as the Insert slot A value of 2 sets the second plug in slot as the Insert slot and so on With Split mode turned on this applies to Split Upper Insert Slot Split Lower Sets the current Insert slot number for Split Lower when selecting or editing a plug in when Split mode is turned on Plug in Parameter Page Defines which parameter is assigned to the leftmost encoder when editing a plug in The next plug in parameter is assigned to encoder 2 and so on This applies to Split Upper when Split mode is turned on Note The plug in and instrument page parameters are kept separate as this allows you to quickly switch between editing an instrument and an effect plug in on a channel without having to adjust the parameter page every time Plug in Param Page Split Lower Defines which parameter is assigned to the leftmost encoder of Split Lower when editing a plug in with Split mode turned on The next plug in parameter is assigned to encoder 2 and so on e Track Defines which track is displayed for Channel Strip views When Split mode is turned on this applies to Split
66. of the LCD V Pot 3 For software instrument tracks turn to choose the instrument Press the V Pot 3 button to confirm your choice insert the instrument and open the plug in window Chapter 3 Mackie Control 71 72 Control Action V Pot 4 For audio and software instrument tracks turn to choose the plug in used on Insert slot 1 Press the V Pot 4 button to confirm your choice insert the effect and open the plug in window V Pot 5 For audio and software instrument tracks turn to choose the plug in used on Insert slot 2 Press the V Pot 4 button to confirm your choice insert the effect and open the plug in window V Pot 6 Edits the send level of Send 1 V Pot 7 Edits the send level of Send 2 V Pot 8 Edits the send level of Send 3 Holding down SHIFT while pressing one of the MUTE or V Pot buttons switches between mute and bypass Control Action V Pot 1 or Mute 1 Mutes or unmutes the channel strip V Pot 2 or Mute 2 Mutes or unmutes the channel strip V Pot 3 or Mute 3 For software instrument tracks mutes or unmutes the software instrument used on the channel strip V Pot 4 or Mute 4 For audio and software instrument tracks bypasses the effect plug in used in Insert slot 1 V Pot 5 or Mute 5 For audio and software instrument tracks bypasses the effect plug in used in Insert slot 2 V Pot 6 or Mute 6 Mutes or unmutes Send 1 V Pot 7 or Mute 7 Mutes or unmutes Send 2
67. other countries Other company and product names mentioned herein are trademarks of their respective companies Mention of third party products is for informational purposes only and constitutes neither an endorsement nor a recommendation Apple assumes no responsibility with regard to the performance or use of these products Preface Chapter 1 Chapter 2 Chapter 3 CONN 11 12 15 16 18 26 31 32 32 35 35 37 37 38 41 59 61 63 64 64 67 70 84 87 88 89 Contents An Introduction to Control Surfaces What Are Control Surfaces About the Logic Pro Documentation Additional Resources Basic Control Surface Setup Getting Started Connecting Control Surfaces Adding Control Surfaces to Logic Pro Creating Control Surface Groups Configuring Your Control Surface Setup Setting Control Surfaces Preferences Modal Dialog Display Control Surface Usage Tips Control Surfaces Supported by Logic Pro About Control Surface Plug ins About Software and Firmware Customizing Controller Assignments Assigning Controllers to Logic Pro Parameters Controller Assignments Working in Easy View Controller Assigments Working in Expert View Assigning Buttons to Key Commands Controller Assignments Storage Mackie Control Setting Up Your Mackie Control in Logic Pro Mackie Control Display Zone Mackie Control Channel Strip Controls Mackie Control Assignment Zone Mackie Control Fader Bank Zone Mackie Control Functi
68. plug in window The button is also sometimes used to switch to a special assignment mode When a value or name such as a plug in has been preselected but not confirmed or instantiated the value or name flashes on the main LCD until you press the V Pot button Chapter 3 Mackie Control 67 68 The current value of the parameter you are adjusting with the V Pot is displayed on the main LCD depending on the Name Value setting and is also indicated by the ring of LEDs encircling the V Pot The way that parameter values are displayed on the LED ring varies depending on the type of parameter being displayed Holding down the CMD ALT button sets the V Pots to high resolution fine mode for parameters where this mode applies Holding down the OPTION button and turning the V Pot switches between the minimum default and maximum values for the parameter Mackie Control REC RDY Button Pressing the REC RDY button arms the channel strip for recording If the channel is currently armed pressing the REC RDY button disarms it Each REC RDY button features a red LED which is illuminated when the channel is armed for recording Holding down the OPTION button while pressing the REC RDY button of any channel disarms all channel strips Mackie Control Signal LED The Signal LED indicates the presence of an outgoing MIDI or audio signal During recording it indicates the presence of an incoming signal Mackie Control SOLO Button Pressing
69. set various automation parameters AS Pots knobs are in Pan Send Assignment mode b1 b9 Pots are in Plug in or Instrument Bank Select mode In Pots are in Instrument Edit mode Lt Mute buttons display set Latch automation mode Mu Mute has been enabled P1 P9 Pots are in Effect Edit mode PA Pots are in Pan Send mode rd Mute buttons display set Read automation mode Re Rec Rdy has been enabled So Solo has been enabled Tc Mute buttons display set Touch automation mode Wr Mute buttons display set Write automation mode Other text When a channel is selected the first two characters of its name are briefly displayed Numbers While editing a numerical value with a fader or pot the current value is displayed If there are more than two digits in the value the last two digits are shown Plus minus signs are shown if only one digit is displayed JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Pots As the pots are not motorized Pickup mode is used if turned on in the Control Surfaces preferences In Pickup mode the controller must reach pick up the current value before the value starts to change This prevents sudden jumps of parameter values caused by playing back automation Chapter 8 JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk A pot s current value is indicated by the NULL arrow LEDs e The Upper arrow is lit if the pot s value is above the current value e The Lower arrow is lit if the pot s value is below the current value Both arrow
70. so on Send Parameter Choose the Send parameter controlled by the encoders when in the Send Multi Channel view The choices are e Destination Encoder is used to determine the bus channel number for the Send slot Level Encoder is used to adjust the Send level e Position Encoders set Pre Post or Post Pan fader modes Mute Encoders mute unmute the selected Send slot Send Parameter Page Sets the current page for the Send parameters Up to 32 parameters are available in Send Channel Strip view for a given channel eight Send slots multiplied by the four parameters listed above Split no of upper parameters Sets the number of encoders that belong to Split Upper for control surfaces that support Split mode The remaining encoders belong to Split Lower A value of 0 means that Split mode is off all encoders are assigned to the Split Upper area Control surfaces that support Split mode allow the display of two separate parameter sections within one plug in or even different plug ins They are called Split Upper and Split Lower Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Instrument Parameter Page Determines which parameter is assigned to the leftmost encoder when editing a software instrument The next instrument parameter is assigned to encoder 2 and so on This applies to Split Upper when Split mode is turned on Inst Parameter Page Split Lower Sets the parameter that is assigned to the leftmost encoder
71. surround diversity In EQ Frequency Gain view Adjusts the gain of the selected EQ band In Send Destination Level Mixer view Adjusts the send level of the selected send In Send Destination Level Channel view Adjusts the send level of the send on the selected channel strip Chapter 3 Mackie Control 69 70 Mackie Control Master Fader The Master fader controls the level of the primary master channel strip in the Logic Pro Mixer This raises or lowers the level of all output channel strips without changing their relative levels When no master channel strip exists in the project the Mackie Control Master fader is mapped to output channel strip 1 2 If you use multiple audio systems simultaneously the Master fader only controls the master channel strip of the first device matching the order shown in the Audio Preferences window Mackie Control Assignment Zone Directly below the Assignment LED are six ASSIGNMENT buttons Press one of the ASSIGNMENT buttons to select the type of parameter that you want to control or edit with the channel strip V Pots faders and switches The corresponding LED is lit to indicate the currently active assignment and the Assignment display shows a two digit abbreviation of the assignment type The ASSIGNMENT buttons work in both Single and All views View modes are discussed in Control Surface Group Parameters Mackie Control Assignment Modes Each ASSIGNMENT button has two views Mixer
72. the Back key navigates up one level in the menu hierarchy Euphonix Using the Pan Surround Knobset This knobset allows you to adjust a channel strip s Pan Surround control If the channel strip s input format is set to Surround the knobset displays the following parameters Surround Angle Surround Diversity LFE Level Surround X left right Surround Y front back Spread e Center Level To adjust the pan surround control Press the Pan Surround knob top or key to display the Pan Surround parameters for the currently selected channel strip Note If using the MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode The parameter names are displayed on the Soft Keys the touchscreen or the display depending on the system you are using Turn the respective knob to change the parameter value Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value Press the Back key to return to the top level knobset Euphonix Using the Group Knobset This knobset allows you to edit a channel strip s group membership To add a channel strip to a group Press the Group knob top or key to display the list of groups that the currently selected channel strip is assigned to This key is labeled Grp on the CM408T channel strip Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport Note If using the MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode The groups names are displayed on the Soft Keys th
73. the Expert View button Choose a zone or mode unless you want to make a modeless assignment and click the plus button in the lower left corner of the Control Parameter list A new blank assignment appears in the Control Parameter list Click the Learn Mode button to start the Learn process Move the controller on your control surface that you want to assign to the selected parameter Moving the controller sends a MIDI message to Logic Pro thus teaching Logic Pro which controller you are assigning The Learn Mode button remains active allowing you to make further assignments The incoming MIDI message appears in the Input message field Once Logic Pro has received the message choose the class of parameter you want to assign from the Class pop up menu Assign the parameter by making appropriate choices in the pop up menus and fields that appear below the Class pop up menu Note A detailed explanation of classes and other assignment parameters can be found in Using the Control Name and Label Fields When you finish click the Learn Mode button or press Command L to complete the Learn process Tip You can use the shortcut described in As to assign a series of controllers to a series of similar parameters annaa CAnaeatCantrallarcin E gning a series of Controllers in Ec Should you accidentally move the wrong controller in Learn mode you can easily delete an unwanted assignment To delete an assignment in Ex
74. the LCD displays parameters allowing you to edit effects This mode also allows you to switch between different Insert slots enabling each effect to be edited Control Assignment COMPARE Switches the display between track name parameter name and parameter name parameter value modes BYPASS Switches the bypass state of plug in currently being edited INSERT PARAM Switches between Plug in Assign and Plug in Edit modes Selecting virtual encoders 1 to 4 Use cursor keys and then press ENTER button Pan Assignment mode Parameter control 1 button centers pan or surround angle Parameter control 2 button centers surround diversity Parameter control 3 button resets surround LFE level Parameter control 4 button resets spread Send Assignment mode Enables disables Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Assignment mode Confirms the plug in selection for Insert slots 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and enters Plug in Edit mode for the selected Insert slot Plug In Edit mode Sets value to default or switches buttons with two states Moving virtual encoders 1 to 4 Use cursor keys and then rotate parameter wheel Pan Assignment mode Parameter control 1 edits pan or surround angle Parameter control 2 edits surround diversity Parameter control 3 edits surround LFE level Parameter control 4 edits spread Send Assignment mode Controls the Send level of Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug
75. the MUTE buttons display and switch the current EQ band s Bypass status Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons EQ Channel View EQ Channel view allows you to edit all EQ parameters in all bands for the selected channel strip The mode display shows EQ EQ channel strip The upper row of the LCD shows the name of the channel strip EQs the page number and total number of pages for example Page 1 2 Control Action V Pot 1 Edits the frequency of odd numbered EQ bands V Pot 2 Edits the gain of odd numbered EQ bands V Pot 3 Edits the Q factor of odd numbered EQ bands V Pot 4 Switches the bypass status of odd numbered EQ bands V Pot 5 Edits the frequency of even numbered EQ bands V Pot 6 Edits the gain of even numbered EQ bands V Pot 7 Edits the Q factor of even numbered EQ bands V Pot 8 Switches the bypass status of even numbered EQ bands The Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons switch to the next or previous EQ band The LCD displays two EQ bands If you have one or more connected Mackie Control XT units each XT can display two EQ bands up to a total of eight bands Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons Alternate EQ Edit Mode Options Holding down the EQ button gives you access to a further submenu in the LCD The mode display shows E_ or E_ depending on whether you are in EQ Mixer or EQ Cha
76. the SOLO button solos the channel strip which equates to muting all unsoloed channels Each SOLO button features an amber LED which is illuminated when the channel strip is soloed The Rude Solo LED on the right edge of the display zone is also lit whenever any channel is soloed Holding down the OPTION button while pressing any channel SOLO button disables solo for all channel strips In the Send Destination Level view see Mackie Control SEND Button the SOLO button controls the Pre Post mode selection for both Mixer view and Channel view Mackie Control MUTE Button Pressing the MUTE button silences the channel Each MUTE button features a red LED which is lit when the channel is muted Holding down the OPTION button while pressing any channel strip MUTE button unmutes all muted channel strips In the EQ Frequency Gain and Send Destination Level views the MUTE button controls the EQ bypass or Send Mute function This affects both Mixer and Channel views Chapter 3 Mackie Control Mackie Control SELECT Button Pressing the SELECT button chooses activates the channel for channel based editing or assignment commands Each SELECT button features a green LED which is lit when the channel is selected Holding down the SHIFT button while pressing a channel s SELECT button sets the channel volume to unity level 0 dB Note While holding down the SHIFT button the SELECT button LED indicates if the channel volume is set to 0 dB
77. the control surface to Arrange View mode and your Arrange window shows multiple subtracks with various parameters Surround Parameter Choose the surround parameter that the rotary encoders will control The choices are Angle Encoders adjust surround angle e Diversity Encoders adjust surround diversity direction LFE Encoders adjust LFE level Spread Encoders adjust the Spread parameter of Stereo to Surround channel strips X Encoders adjust surround X position e Y Encoders adjust surround Y position Center Encoders adjust the Center channel level Note The X and Y parameters are a different representation of the Angle and Diversity parameters and thus are independent of them The X and Y parameters support the use of surround joysticks EQ Band Sets the current EQ band so that you can edit a particular Channel EQ or Linear Phase EQ parameter for all tracks in the EQ Multi Channel View EQ Parameter Choose which parameter of the selected EQ band is controlled by the encoders in EQ Multi Channel View The choices are Frequency Encoders adjust the frequency of the selected band Gain Encoders adjust the gain of the selected band For the Low Cut band 1 and High Cut band 8 bands of the Channel and Linear Phase EQ this parameter controls the slope Q Encoders adjust the Q factor of the selected band On Off Encoders bypass the selected EQ band EQ Parameter Page Sets the EQ parameter d
78. the encoders Note The mode chosen in the Mode pop up menu is only activated when the Value section Mode menu is set to Direct If any of the other Value section Mode menu options is chosen the following applies Toggle The assignment toggles between the zone s first mode and the chosen mode The mode change assignment must be located in the same zone e Relative Useful for stepping up and down through modes in a zone using two buttons or for choosing a mode with an encoder The minimum destination parameter represents this zone s first mode and the maximum represents the zone s last mode The mode change assignment must be located in the same zone Rotate Useful for stepping through all available modes with a single button Used with a Jog Wheel for example Off gt Scrub gt Shuttle gt Off The minimum destination parameter represents this zone s first mode and the maximum represents the zone s last mode The mode change assignment must be located in the same zone Global Choosing the Global class lets you use an assignment to control global parameters A Parameter pop up menu appears below the Class pop up menu offering the parameters listed in the following table Note All options listed in the table below only work in relative mode where changes are relative to the starting value position and so on Global options Explanation Playhead This assignment controls the position of the playhead feedback i
79. the value MSB or Most Significant Bits Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 55 56 For messages containing only a Lo7 placeholder the value is treated as 7 bit For messages containing both a Lo7 and Hi7 placeholder the value is treated as 14 bit The order of Lo7 and Hi7 is honored and there may be constant bytes in between This allows you to define Control Change LSB and MSB portions For example BO 08 Hi7 BO 28 Lo7 indicates a 14 bit message Note When you enter multiple MIDI messages always enter each message completely being sure to repeat the status byte even if it s the same It may help to write out the message to ensure that the correct byte works as you can t know what status the previously sent message had For messages containing neither Lo7 nor Hi7 placeholders Logic Pro assumes an incoming value of 1 This is typical for pressed or released buttons Also see Multiply Field in Editing Value Parameters in Expert View Touch Release Field Enter an integer value to use the incoming MIDI message for status changes of the destination parameter from touched to released or vice versa A non zero value means touched a value of 0 means released The messages are shown and edited in the same way as the Value Change field Note The Touch Release setting only applies to the Channel Strip assignment class and to parameters that can be automated Editing Value Parameters in Expert View The parameters in
80. this section let you control different aspects of the values for incoming MIDI messages Min and Max Fields Enter an integer value to set the minimum and maximum range for incoming values represented by Lo7 and Hi7 Typically the minimum defaults to 0 and the maximum defaults to 127 Some control surfaces such as the CM Labs Motor Mix may use the same message with different value ranges for different controls For more specific information refer to the documentation that came with your device Format Pop Up Menu Choose the encoding format for negative values in the 7 bit portions sent over MIDI The choices are Unsigned No negative values are possible The full 7 or 14 bit range is treated as a positive number The value range is 0 to 127 7 bit or 0 to 16383 14 bit 25 complement If the most significant bit is set the value is negative To obtain the absolute value invert all bits and add 1 The value range is from 128 7 bit to 127 or 8192 to 8191 14 bit Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 15complement If the most significant bit is set the value is negative To set the absolute value invert all bits Note that this allows two possible encoding values for zero The value range is 127 to 127 7 bit or 8191 to 8191 14 bit Sign Magnitude If the most significant bit is set the value is negative To set the absolute value clear the most significant bit Note that this allows two possible enco
81. to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control AUX 1 Modifier Assignment In Insert Display mode Assigns Send 1 level of channel strips to encoders Assigns Send 1 level of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Assigns Sends 1 to 4 of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Use the ENTER button to switch the bypass state of Sends 1 to 4 In Channel Display mode Assigns Send 1 level of channel strips to encoders and virtual encoders Shows current Send 1 destination assignment when button is held down DAW SHIFT ADD Same as AUX 5 but for Send 6 AUX 2 DAW SHIFT ADD Same as AUX 1 but for Send 2 Same as AUX 5 but for Send 7 AUX 3 Same as AUX 1 but for Send 3 DAW SHIFT ADD Same as AUX 5 but for Send 8 AUX 4 Same as AUX 1 but for Send 4 Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 269 270 Control Modifier AUX 5 Assignment In Insert Display mode Assigns Send 5 level of channel strips to encoders Assigns Send 5 level of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Assigns Sends 5 to 8 of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Use the ENTER button to switch the bypass state of Sends 5 to 8 In Channel Display mode Assigns Send 5 level of channel strips to encoders and virtual encoders Shows current Send 5 destination assignment when button is held down
82. to define a counterpart for Flip mode for supported control surfaces that offer Flip mode By setting a fader and an encoder to the same flip group for example they are coupled To set none enter a value of 0 For unsupported devices you need to set up two active assignments both of which use the same flip group One assignment needs to be absolute using a fader for example the other relative encoder for example Exclusive Checkbox When selected the assignment deactivates all other assignments that have Exclusive turned off for the same control on supported control surfaces This limits the overwriting of a modeless assignment to particular modes For example faders normally control volume To create a mode where faders control the send level select Exclusive Setting Class Pop Up Menu Parameters Choose the class of assignment the type of destination parameter controlled from the pop up menu Different options appear below the Class pop up menu when you choose a class The following section describes the different classes and the options available for each Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments Mode Change Choosing the Mode Change class lets you use an assignment to switch from one mode to another An additional Mode pop up menu appears below the Class pop up menu allowing you to choose between available modes For example the assignment buttons ona Mackie Control can be used to choose different modes for
83. to your computer MIDI interfaces are typically connected to your computer via the USB or FireWire connection protocols MIDI uses separate ports for input and output and you must connect both the MIDI input and output to use the device with Logic Pro The following diagram illustrates a typical setup using MIDI input and output MID interface Out port In port SSE 4 0000 In port Out port Computer Control surface It is recommended that you do not daisy chain other MIDI devices via MIDI through to the MIDI In or Out ports used by control surfaces Daisy chaining can result in errors and other problems due to the amount of data transmitted in real time Optional Footswitches and Pedals Some control surfaces allow you to connect footswitches or pedals as additional controllers If your control surface features suitable connectors you can connect optional footswitches to remotely control playback and other functions This frees your hands for other controls and can also be helpful when using guitars or other instruments that require two handed playing Powering Up Once everything is connected press the power switch on your control surface Once powered the displays such as an LCD if your device has one or LEDs are lit Some LCDs display a welcome message which includes the firmware version number On most control surfaces with motorized faders each f
84. useful for button presses that cycle between modes automation mode for example e X OR The value defines a bit mask a filter in other words which is applied to the parameter s current value with the exclusive or Boolean operation Useful for enabling disabling single channel strip types in All view For On Off parameters Mode is set to Toggle by default It is set to Scaled for absolute controls faders and knobs for example or to Relative for encoders Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 58 Feedback Pop Up Menu Choose the display format for the parameter s current value on the control surface display The choices are None No feedback is sent Single Dot Line LED rings only one LED LCDs a single vertical line Left to Right Bar A bar from the minimum to the current value Bar from Center A bar from the center position to the current value Right to Left Bar A bar from the current value to the maximum Q Spread Two equal bars from the center to the current value Ascending Bar A bar from the bottom to the current value Descending Bar A bar from the top to the current value Text Only LED rings no feedback LCDs no feedback as a graphics element Automatic Dependent on the currently assigned parameter the most suitable feedback mode is used Plug in and Instrument parameters carry this information Pan displays a Single Dot Line and all other parameters display a b
85. value change Touch Release field Enter an integer value to force incoming MIDI messages to change the touch release status of the selected parameter This only applies to control surfaces that offer touch sensitive controls where touching or releasing a fader for example enables or disables reception of data from the control surface Value Area The area at the bottom right shows the following parameters See Editing Value Parameters in Expert View for details n E Min and Max fields Enter integer values to set the range of incoming MIDI values Format pop up menu Choose the format used to encode negative values Multiply field Enter a value to scale incoming MIDI values Mode pop up menu Choose the mode used by incoming values to modify the current parameter value Feedback pop up menu and checkboxes Choose the display format of the parameter value on the control surface display if applicable Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments Assigning and Deleting Controllers in Expert View You can use the Learn process to assign controllers when the Controller Assignments window is in Expert view just as you would in Easy view You can also assign controllers to classes of Logic Pro parameters that are not accessible in Easy view To learn a controller for a non channel strip or plug in parameter Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Controller Assignments or use Command k and click
86. values caused by playing back automation Your device may feature a display usually a pair of arrow LEDs that indicates the direction or distance you need to move the controller in order to match the settings shown in Logic Pro also known as NULL Once you have matched the onscreen values deactivate Pickup mode and start automating When Pickup mode is turned off adjusting a fader modifies the parameter immediately which can result in parameter value jumps Flash Mute and Solo buttons checkbox When selected the Mute and Solo buttons on the control surface will blink flash on and off when mute or solo modes are engaged Multiple Controls per Parameter pop up menu Choose the maximum number of encoders used for each parameter when editing plug ins or audio instruments The choices are 1 Parameters are always displayed using one encoder per parameter with the least space available for parameter name and value in the LCD e 2 On each unit encoders 1 and 2 are used for the first parameter encoders 3 and 4 for the second and so on e 4 On each unit encoders 1 to 4 are used for the first parameter encoders 5 to 8 for the second and so on e 8 On each unit encoders 1 to 8 are used for the first parameter encoders 9 to 16 for the second and so on When multiple encoders are used per parameter the encoders are divided into groups 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 for example The first encoder of each group controls the parameter
87. view and Channel view These views provide two ways to edit parameters in your project Mixer view Displays and allows you to edit a single parameter in multiple channels Channel view Displays and allows you to edit multiple parameters for a single channel The mode display shows a period in the lower right corner when Channel view is active Pressing an ASSIGNMENT button once selects it and switches to the Mixer view except when switching between Instrument Edit view and Plug in Edit view In this case the mode remains in Channel view Note For each of the ASSIGNMENT buttons the parameters you can edit will change depending on the active view mode The NAME VALUE button also affects what is shown on the main LCD when in the Mixer and Channel views For more information see Mackie Control Function Key Zone Chapter 3 Mackie Control Mackie Control TRACK Button Pressing the TRACK button selects Channel view and assigns the channel strip controls to edit channel strip parameters Press the TRACK button once to edit a single parameter in multiple channel strips and to activate Mixer view e Press the TRACK button again to edit multiple parameters for a single channel strip and switch to Channel view Mixer View Mixer view allows you to edit a single parameter in multiple channel strips volume pan input format input assignment output assignment or automation mode When you switch to Mixer view the para
88. which channel strips are displayed by using Direct mode or which are toggled by using X OR mode Fader Bank for MIDI Channel These fader bank parameters are used in All View when only one Strips Input Channel Strips channel strip type is displayed This allows you to switch between Audio Channel Strips Instrument several channel strip types while retaining the current fader bank Channel Strips Aux Channel for each type Strips Bus Channel Strips Output Channel Strips If you choose one of the fader bank or parameter page settings in the Parameter pop up menu the following Bank Type options appear below the pop up menu By One The fader bank or parameter page is shifted by one channel strip or parameter Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments By Bank The fader bank or parameter page is shifted by the number of displayed channel strips or parameters CS Group Setting The fader bank or parameter page is shifted by the value defined for the Parameter Page Shift Mode control surface group parameter Automation Group Choosing the Automation Group class allows you to use the assignment to set an automation group parameter When this class is chosen a Group field appears below the Class pop up menu You can determine the edited group by entering a number in the field Entering a 0 sets this parameter to the group selected for the Automation Group parameter in the control surface group parameters A P
89. your computer screen Enter a name and location for the file then click the Save button in the dialog The main LCD displays this message There is a file select dialog on the screen The Position Time display shows ALERT All LEDs are unlit Once the Save operation has been confirmed in Logic Pro the Mackie Control returns all controls to their previous state before you pressed the SAVE button Once you have named a project and saved it further presses of the SAVE button store the current project state without presenting a Save dialog onscreen or showing any alerts on the LCD This allows you to quickly save incremental changes you make as your project develops The SAVE LED is illuminated as soon as you make saveable changes to your project Holding down the OPTION button while pressing SAVE opens the Save As dialog on the computer screen This allows you to rename a project or save it in a different location UNDO Button Pressing the UNDO button undoes the last undoable action As Logic Pro supports a nearly unlimited number of undo redo steps the green UNDO LED illuminates to indicate that Redo is available not to indicate an undoable step The LCD provides a warning that performing a reversible editing step will render all Redo steps unavailable Holding down the SHIFT button while pressing UNDO performs a Redo Holding down the OPTION button while pressing UNDO opens the Undo History window Chapter 3 Mackie C
90. 2 The SAC 2 2 2k s native mode is directly supported but it can also emulate a Mackie Control You should use the native mode See Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Radikal Technologies SAC 2k See Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Sl 24 Roland See Roland SI 24 TranzPort Frontier Design Group See Frontier Design TranzPort US 224 Tascam A stripped down version of the US 428 See Tascam US 428 and US 224 US 2400 Tascam Logic Pro supports the US 2400 s native mode In contrast to its Mackie Control mode all controls including the joystick are supported See Tascam US 2400 US 428 Tascam See Tascam US 428 and US 224 Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup About Control Surface Plug ins Supported control surfaces communicate with Logic Pro via special plug in files that are installed along with Logic Pro The plug in files are located in the Contents MIDI Device Plug ins subfolder of the Logic Pro application bundle To view the bundle contents Control click the Logic Pro application icon and choose Show Package Contents from the shortcut menu Logic Pro also checks for control surface plug ins installed in the optional Library Application Support MIDI Device Plug ins and Library Application Support MIDI Device Plug ins the denotes your user home directory folders When new control surface plug ins are released independently of a Logic Pro update or supplied directly by the device manufacturer
91. 96 Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Yamaha 01V96 interface elements to Logic functions Yamaha 01V96 DISPLAY ACCESS Section Yamaha 01V96 FADER MODE Section Yamaha 01V96 Basic LCD Functions Yamaha 01V96 LCD Modal Display Functions Yamaha 01V96 SELECTED CHANNEL Section Yamaha 01V96 Data Entry Section Yamaha 01V96 Channel Strips Yamaha 01V96 Stereo Channel Strip Section Yamaha 01V96 User Defined Keys Section Yamaha 01V96 DISPLAY ACCESS Section The following table outlines the DISPLAY ACCESS controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the control name Control Modifier Assignment DAW AUTO STATUS While held down in Channel Display mode the display shows the automation mode of the 16 channel strips in the current bank selection PAIR GROUP Enters Group Edit mode When a channel strip group is selected channel strip membership is indicated by a lit SEL button Use this button to enable disable the channel strip s group membership Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display properties of the currently selected group Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4 enable disable properties of the currently selected group When INSERT PA
92. Assignment FADER Enables disables Flip mode AUX MTRX Enables disables Flip mode Yamaha DM2000 DISPLAY ACCESS Section The following table outlines the DISPLAY ACCESS controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as USER 4 preassigned to SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment METER Clears overload LEDs USER 4 Switches the Mixer to the All view displaying all channel strips that exist in your project Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 Control Modifier Assignment USER 13 Opens or closes a second Arrange window Yamaha DM2000 EFFECT PLUG IN Section The following table outlines the EFFECT PLUG IN controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as USER 4 preassigned to SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment Display Opens or closes the Sample Editor 6 Switches display between track name parameter name and parameter name parameter value modes 7 Switches the bypass state of Insert sl
93. CH is held down SEL buttons are lit if a channel strip is in Touch automation mode Pressing the SEL button sets Touch mode Turning the encoder also edits the automation mode LATCH While LATCH is held down SEL buttons are lit if a channel strip is in Latch automation mode Pressing the SEL button sets Latch mode Turning the encoder also edits the automation mode F7 Switches encoders to editing of pan surround parameters on selected channel strip Surround parameters are shown as follows angle radius LFE level Spread mode X Y Center level F8 Switches encoders to Channel view EQ Edit mode for the selected channel strip In this mode the encoders are used to edit the EQ parameters while the left right cursors are used to shift the EQ parameter bank parameter group F9 Switches encoders to Channel view Plug in Edit mode for the selected channel strip In this mode the left right cursors are used to shift the plug in parameter bank The up down cursors are used to choose the channel strip Insert slot for editing F10 Switches encoders to Channel view Instrument Edit mode for the selected channel strip In this mode the left right cursors are used to shift the instrument parameter bank Mode Controls Section FW 1082 Only The following table outlines the mode controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has
94. Comments Same function as V Pot of same channel In Flip mode Swap Swap function with V Pot of same channel In Surround Angle Diversity view Adjust surround diversity In EQ Frequency Gain view Adjust gain of selected EQ band In Send Destination Level Mixer view Adjust send level of selected send In Send Destination Level Channel view Adjust send level of send on selected channel strip Mackie Control ASSIGNMENT Buttons Hold down to show a shortcut menu on the LCD Functions or commands are assigned to V Pots Release the chosen Assignment button to switch V Pots to Multi Channel or Channel views The table outlines both the standard use of Assignment buttons and when used in conjunction with a modifier button Button Modifier Function Comments TRACK Channel strip parameters TRACK SHIFT User mode 1 PAN SURROUND Pan Surround parameters PAN SURROUND SHIFT User mode 2 EQ EQ parameters EQ SHIFT User mode 3 SEND Send parameters SEND SHIFT User mode 4 PLUG IN Plug in selection or Plug in Edit mode PLUG IN SHIFT User mode 5 INSTRUMENT Instrument selection or Instrument Edit mode INSTRUMENT SHIFT User mode 6 Chapter 3 Mackie Control Button Modifier Function Comments BANK lt gt Shift fader BANK LEFT RIGHT by number of channel strips OPTION Shift fader bank to beginning or end CHANNE
95. Connect the unit bidirectionally with two free not used by other devices MIDI interface ports When used as a control surface the SI 24 can be used with all Mac systems that are capable of running Logic Pro Obviously you will require another device for audio input and output To scan for your Roland SI 24 unit Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup Choose Install in the New menu Select Roland SI 24 in the Install window Click the Scan button Logic Pro scans for and automatically installs your control surface 215 Roland SI 24 Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Roland SI 24 interface elements to Logic functions Roland SI 24 Channel Strips Roland SI 24 STATUS MODE Section Roland SI 24 CH ASSIGN Controls Roland SI 24 MASTER Section Roland SI 24 SURROUND PAN Section Roland SI 24 Numeric Key Section Roland SI 24 Transport Section Roland SI 24 Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT shown below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment EQ ON OFF 1 to 4 In Pan mode Switches the bypass state of EQ bands 1 4 Enters EQ Send mode If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected channel a Channel EQ is automatically inserted In EQ Se
96. Controllers in Expert View To define a mode Click the Add button in the lower left corner of the Mode list Anew blank mode appears in the Mode list It is highlighted allowing you to immediately rename it Enter a name for the mode If you want to add controllers to a mode see Assigning and Deleting Controllers in Expert View Reassigning a Controller in Expert View The procedure for reassigning an active controller an assigned controller in the active mode is different from that of an inactive controller one with an assignment in an inactive mode To reassign an active controller Use the Learn process described in Assigning and Deleting Controllers in Expert View to assign an active controller one with an assignment in the active mode and choose one of the options shown in the dialog This control is already assigned to another parameter Do you want to reassign the control Coane Keep both Cancel Deletes the new assignment retaining the existing assignment Keep Both Retains the new and old assignments Used typically when one knob controls multiple parameters as a macro Reassign Deletes all existing active assignments for this parameter Used to reassign a function key F1 to F8 for example to a new key command To reassign an inactive controller Use the Learn process described in Assigning and Deleting Controllers in Expert View to assign a controller in an inactive mode Note that the new
97. Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Down Arrow key Zoom mode zooms out vertically in the window with key focus SHIFT ADD Zoom mode individual track zoom zooms out CMD ALT FINE Page down OPTION ALL Scroll to bottom of window list with key focus CMD ALT FINE Cursor Left Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Left Arrow key Zoom mode zooms out horizontally in the window with key focus SHIFT ADD Zoom mode individual track zoom reset of tracks of the same type CMD ALT FINE Page left OPTION ALL Scroll to left border of the window with key focus CMD ALT FINE Chapter 13 Mackie HU 189 190 Control Modifier Assignment Cursor Right Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Right Arrow key Zoom mode zooms in horizontally in the window with key focus SHIFT ADD Zoom mode individual track zoom reset of all tracks regardless of type CMD ALT FINE Page right OPTION ALL Scroll to right border of the window with key CMD ALT FINE focus MODE Switches between Cursor and Zoom modes Mackie HUI Jog Wheel The following table outlines the Jog Wheel controls and their assignments Control Assignment Jog Wheel Default Move playhead by one bar Scrub button lit Scrub mode Shuttle button lit Shuttle mode SCRUB Activates or deactivates Scrub mode SHUTTLE Activates or deactivates Shuttle mode Mackie HUI Foot Switches The following table outl
98. I message that is sent to the recording light device Generally this will be a MIDI note on message but other data types can be transmitted MIDI Channel Specify the MIDI channel that data is sent on Data 1 Any Record Ready LED This value determines how the Recording Light device responds to a track being record enabled in Logic Pro Data 1 Recording This value determines how the Recording Light device responds when the Record button is engaged in Logic Pro Data 2 On Value Choose the value for the MIDI event that is sent to turn on the Recording Light device Typically this value is 127 Chapter 16 Recording Light A WwW N Roland SI 24 17 This chapter describes how to use your Roland SI 24 with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following e Setting Up Your Roland SI 24 p 215 e Roland SI 24 Assignment Overview p 216 Setting Up Your Roland SI 24 Follow the steps below before using your control surface with Logic Pro To use both the audio and MIDI controller features of the SI 24 Ensure that your SI 24 units are connected to the RPC card with the included cable This connector provides both digital audio and MIDI connections Make sure that the appropriate driver software is installed and functioning correctly Note The RPC card is a PCI device and is not compatible with most G5 and all Intel based Mac computers which only offer PCle interfacing To use the SI 24 as a control surface
99. IN PUNCH Moves playhead to left cycle locator Engages Autopunch mode and sets punch in locator to playhead position LOOP Engages Cycle mode and sets left cycle locator to playhead position OUT Goes to right cycle locator PUNCH Engages Autopunch mode and sets punch out locator to playhead position LOOP Engages Cycle mode and sets right cycle locator to playhead position PUNCH Enables disables Autopunch mode LOOP Enables disables Cycle mode PREV SHIFT Moves playhead to previous marker Sets locators by previous marker ADD Creates marker at playhead position SHIFT Deletes marker at playhead position NEXT Moves playhead to next marker SHIFT Sets locators by next marker Jog Wheel SHIFT Depending on current Jog Wheel mode Moves playhead by bars Controls audio and MIDI scrubbing Shuttles forward or backward Adjusts volume of the currently displayed channel LOOP Sets the left locator to the current playhead position advances the playhead as usual then sets the right locator to the playhead position Further Jog Wheel use while holding down LOOP advances the playhead and sets the right locator Tip Rotating the Jog Wheel counterclockwise while holding down LOOP defines a skip cycle range DROP REW Sets the punch in locator to the current playhead position advances the playhead as usu
100. L lt gt Shift fader BANK LEFT RIGHT by one channel OPTION Shift fader bank to beginning or end FLIP Switch Flip mode between Off and Duplicate SHIFT Switch Flip mode between Off and Swap CONTROL Switch Flip mode between Off and Zero turns fader motors off GLOBAL VIEW Switch between Arrange view and All view SHIFT Switch between Arrange view and Tracks view Mackie Control Function Key Buttons The following table outlines the function key controls and their functions Button Modifier Function Comments F1 Recall screenset 1 SHIFT Open or close Arrange window CMD ALT Cut TRACK Switch to Mixer view Volume PAN SURROUND Switch to Mixer view Pan surround angle EQ Switch to Mixer view Bypass SEND Switch to Mixer view Destination MARKER Create marker without rounding NUDGE Nudge value Tick In modal dialog F1 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 1 key F2 Recall screenset 2 SHIFT Open or close Mixer window CMD ALT Copy TRACK Switch to Mixer view Pan PAN SURROUND Switch to Mixer view Pan surround radius EQ Switch to Mixer view EQ Type SEND Switch to Mixer view Level MARKER Create marker with rounding NUDGE Nudge value Format In modal dialog F2 key is equivalent to computer keyboard 2 key Chapter 3 Mackie Control 105 Button Modifier Function Comments
101. Logic Pro 9 Copyright 2009 Apple Inc All rights reserved Your rights to the software are governed by the accompanying software license agreement The owner or authorized user of a valid copy of Logic Studio software may reproduce this publication for the purpose of learning to use such software No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted for commercial purposes such as selling copies of this publication or for providing paid for support services The Apple logo is a trademark of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Use of the keyboard Apple logo Shift Option K for commercial purposes without the prior written consent of Apple may constitute trademark infringement and unfair competition in violation of federal and state laws Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate Apple is not responsible for printing or clerical errors Note Because Apple frequently releases new versions and updates to its system software applications and Internet sites images shown in this manual may be slightly different from what you see on your screen Apple 1 Infinite Loop Cupertino CA 95014 408 996 1010 A le WW com Apple the Apple logo Apple FireWire Logic Logic Studio MainStage and WaveBurner are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries Intel Intel Core and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corp in the U S and
102. MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode The effect plug in names are displayed on the Soft Keys the touchscreen or the display depending on the system you are using If more than eight effect plug ins are inserted you can use the Page keys to display ensuing plug ins Press the knob top that features the name of the effect plug in you want to edit The parameters are displayed in the order shown in the Controls view of the effect Turn the respective knob to change the value Depending on the system you are using for parameters with only two values you can either press the On key or turn the respective knob to switch between the two values The On key is lit when the value is 1 or on and unlit when the value is 0 or off Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value If there are more than eight parameters use the Page keys to navigate between them Press the Back key to return to the top level knobset Changing or Inserting Effect Plug ins You change or insert effect plug ins in Inserts Configuration mode using the Inserts Configuration knobset To change or insert an effect plug in Press the Inserts knob top or key The key is labeled asterisk on the CM408T channel Strip Note If using the MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode Press both Page keys simultaneously to display the Inserts Configuration knobset The first eight Insert slots of the selected channel st
103. N see Insert Bypass mode in Mackie HUI ASSIGN Section enables disables bypass of currently selected Insert slot V SEL PAN button ON sets Pan parameter to center position if DEFAULT button is on Send 1 to 8 selected edits Send Pre Post activates deactivates Send Mute or sets Send Level to default value In Send Destination Assignment mode Channel Strip Input or Channel Strip Output Assignment mode the V SEL buttons confirm your selection V Pot Adjusts parameter selected in the ASSIGN section AUTO Cycles through automation modes If you hold down an automation mode button pressing AUTO sets this mode SOLO Enables or disables the Solo button OPTION ALL Disables the Solo buttons of all channel strips MUTE Enables or disables the Mute button OPTION ALL Scribble strip Disables the Mute buttons of all channel strips Displays the channel strip name or send input or output assignment SELECT SHIFT ADD Selects the channel strip Sets volume to unity level DEFAULT Sets volume to unity level Fader Adjusts volume or duplicates the V Pot assignment in Flip mode Mackie HUI DSP EDIT ASSIGN Section The following table outlines the DSP controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assig
104. O MID Selects EQ band 5 allowing use of Gain Freq and Q controls for this band ASGN Switches EQ band 5 bypass state LOW Selects EQ band 6 allowing use of Gain Freq and Q controls for this band ASGN Switches EQ band 6 bypass state Tascam US 428 and US 224 Master Section Controls The following table outlines the master section controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as NULL shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment AUX 1 Switches data wheel between Transport Scrub mode and Send 1 Level ASGN Switches Send 1 Mute state AUX 2 Switches data wheel between Transport Scrub mode and Send 2 Level ASGN Switches Send 2 Mute state AUX 3 Switches data wheel between Transport Scrub mode and Send 3 Level ASGN Switches Send 3 Mute state AUX 4 Switches data wheel between Transport Scrub mode and Send 4 Level ASGN Switches Send 4 Mute state ASGN Modifier for function of EQ controls AUX 1 to 4 buttons PAN knob and data wheel F1 Enables disables Cycle mode F2 Enables disables Autopunch mode F3 Enables disables Scrub mode PAN Controls panning of selected channel ASGN Sets currently selected channel s input Chapter 20 Tascam US 428 and US 224 245 246 Control Modifier Assignment NULL Modifier for NULL mode NULL mode
105. ONTROL49 Pads e Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Main Section e Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Channel Strips Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 External Input 167 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Pads The Pads can operate in one of eight modes and three overlays While pressing SCENE you can select modes for the Pads and channel strips Releasing SCENE without pressing a Pad does not affect the currently selected Pad or channel views Pad Assignment 1 Switches Pads to Transport mode 2 Switches Pads to Solo Mute mode 3 Switches Pads to Rec Select mode 4 8 Switches Pads to User 4 8 mode These modes have unassigned Pads You can assign them to key commands with the Learn function 9 Switches channel strips to Pan mode 10 Switches channel strips to Send mode 1 Switches channel strips to Automation mode 12 Switches channel strips to Instrument Edit mode 13 Switches channel strips to Effect Edit mode 14 16 Switches channel strips to User 6 8 mode These modes have unassigned encoders You can assign them with the Logic Pro Learn function Transport Mode This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 1 Pad Assignment 1 Sets main encoder to Transport mode 2 Sets main encoder to Scrub mode 3 Sets main encoder to Shuttle mode 7 Switches sync between internal and external 8 Enables disables metronome click separately for Playback and Record 9 Enables
106. Pause DAW REC Record DAW PRE Sets the left locator at current playhead position DAW IN Sets the punch in locator at current playhead position DAW OUT Sets the punch out locator at current playhead position DAW POST Sets the right locator at current playhead position DAW RTZ Moves the playhead to the left locator position DAW END Moves the playhead to the right locator position Chapter 21 Yamaha 01V96 257 258 Control DAW ONLINE Modifier Assignment Activates or deactivates internal external synchronization DAW QUICK PUNCH Enables disables Autopunch mode DAW AUTO FADER Enables disables volume automation playback and recording DAW AUTO PAN Enables disables pan automation playback and recording DAW AUTO PLUGIN Enables disables plug in parameter automation playback and recording DAW AUTO MUTE Enables disables mute automation playback and recording DAW AUTO SEND Enables disables send level automation playback and recording DAW AUTO WRITE Sets all channel strips to Write automation mode DAW OPTION ALL Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Touch automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Touch DAW AUTO TOUCH Sets all channel strips to Touch automation mode DAW OPTION ALL Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Latch automa
107. RAM is set to PARAM the left and right Tab Scroll buttons scroll through the group properties When set to INSERT the buttons scroll through the groups for editing DAW SHIFT ADD Switches the Mixer to the Arrange view displaying all channel strips that correspond to tracks used in the Arrange area along with their signal flow EFFECT Opens or closes the Sample Editor Chapter 21 Yamaha 01V96 Yamaha 01V96 FADER MODE Section The following table outlines the FADER MODE controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the control name Control Modifier Assignment AUX 1 In Insert Display mode Assigns Send 1 level of channel strips to encoders Assigns Send 1 level of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Assigns Sends 1 to 4 of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Use the ENTER button to switch the bypass state of Sends 1 to 4 In Channel Display mode Assigns Send 1 level of channel strips to encoders and virtual encoders Shows current Send 1 destination assignment when button is held down DAW SHIFT ADD Same as AUX 5 but for Send 6 AUX 2 Same as AUX 1 but for Send 2 DAW SHIFT ADD Same as AUX 5
108. SB Control Surfaces If your control surface has a FireWire or USB port you can connect it directly to your computer using a cable with the appropriate connectors FireWire and USB devices transmit and receive data through a single cable if the device supports bidirectional communication The following diagram illustrates a typical setup using a FireWire or USB cable A Computer Control surface FireWire USB cable It is recommended that you connect FireWire and USB devices directly to your computer rather than through a hub Daisy chaining devices can result in errors and other problems due to the amount of data transmitted in real time Connecting Control Surfaces via Networking Ports A handful of devices are connected via the network LAN ports of your Mac computer using a single standard CAT5 networking cable Most devices connected in this way also incorporate audio I O and digital audio converters plus built in MIDI ports making the addition of these peripherals a simple single cable and driver installation As with FireWire and USB it is recommended that such devices are directly connected to the computer rather than through a network hub or switch Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 14 Connecting MIDI Control Surfaces If your control surface has MIDI input and output ports you can connect it to a MIDI interface and connect the MIDI interface
109. Section Yamaha DM2000 EFFECT PLUG IN Section Yamaha DM2000 LCD Yamaha DM2000 TRACK ARMING Section Yamaha DM2000 AUTOMIX Section Yamaha DM2000 LOCATOR Section Yamaha DM2000 Transport Cursor Section Yamaha DM2000 Channel Strips Yamaha DM2000 USER DEFINED KEYS Section Yamaha DM2000 MATRIX SELECT Section The following table outlines the MATRIX SELECT controls and their assignments Control Assignment MATRIX 1 Switches SEL buttons and encoder buttons between normal behavior and setting a parameter s default value When the AUX 6 button is held down Pressing a channel strip s SEL button resets the channel strip s volume level Pressing a channel strip s encoder button resets the channel strip s pan surround value PAN also needs to be selected in the ENCODER MODE section MATRIX 2 Switches the encoder buttons between Send Position and Send Mute mode MATRIX 4 If ENCODER MODE ASSIGN 4 is on switches the channel strip SEL buttons between Insert Select indicator off and Insert Bypass indicator on modes Yamaha DM2000 AUX SELECT Section The following table outlines the AUX SELECT controls and their assignments 280 Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 Note A modifier button such as USER 4 preassigned to SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown w
110. Sets the punch in locator at current playhead position END Navigates to the right locator SHIFT Sets the punch out locator at current playhead position Chapter 12 Mackie Baby HUI 175 Control Modifier Assignment BANK SELECT Left Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left SHIFT Shifts channel strips by one channel to the left BANK SELECT Right Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right SHIFT Shifts channel strips by one channel to the right Mackie Baby HUI Transport Section The following table outlines the transport controls and their assignments REWIND Shuttles backward FAST FWD Shuttles forward STOP Stop PLAY Play RECORD Record 176 Chapter 12 Mackie Baby HUI _ ao uu A U N Mackie HUI 13 This chapter describes how to use your Mackie HUI with Logic Pro Important There are a number of control surfaces not mentioned in this guide that can emulate the HUI Such devices are not supported by Apple nor are they guaranteed to work with Logic Pro in HUI emulation mode This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Mackie HUI p 177 e Mackie HUI Assignment Overview p 178 Setting Up Your Mackie HUI HUI control surface devices don t support automatic scanning You need to manually add these devices to your setup When you add a device in this way you need to assign the MIDI In and Out port parameters To set up Mackie HUI devices Make sure that your
111. Show value units for parameter checkboxes see below are selected it will be appended by the measurement unit where applicable for example dB Hz or Note The following options only have an effect if at least one of the two parameters described above is active Display Duration slider Drag to adjust the time that parameter names and values remain on the LCD display following selection and adjustments Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Show info for multiple parameters checkbox When selected the long name information appears in the display until the most recently edited parameter s display times out This may cause overlapping text When unselected the long name display is only shown for the most recently edited parameter which can cause screen flicker Show info when selecting tracks checkbox When turned on Selected appears in the upper row of the LCD and the selected track s name is shown in the lower row when you select a track Show info when editing volume checkbox When selected the word Volume appears in the upper row of the LCD and the edited value appears in the lower row when you edit a track s volume Show value units for checkboxes When selected parameter values are appended by the appropriate measurement unit Hz or for example You can set this option separately for Instrument plug in parameters and Volume and other paramete
112. Shuttle mode ENTER Enters selected folder DEC Exits folder INC Switches between Cursor and Zoom modes Cursor Up Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Up Arrow key Zoom mode zooms out vertically Cursor Down Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Down Arrow key Zoom mode zooms out vertically Cursor Left Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Left Arrow key Zoom mode zooms out horizontally 264 Chapter 22 Yamaha 02R96 Control Assignment Cursor Right Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Right Arrow key Zoom mode zooms in horizontally Chapter 22 Yamaha 02R96 265 Yamaha DM1000 23 This chapter describes how to use your Yamaha DM1000 with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Yamaha DM1000 p 267 Yamaha DM1000 Assignment Overview p 268 Setting Up Your Yamaha DM1000 Follow the steps below before using your DM1000 with Logic Pro e Make sure that your DM1000 device is connected to the computer via USB Make sure that the latest USB MIDI driver for the device is installed Visit the manufacturer s website to download the most recent driver version if necessary To set up your system with Logic Pro On the DM1000 device a Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SETUP button repeatedly until the Setup gt MIDI Host page is visible b Use the cursor buttons to move to the DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section and rotate the parame
113. T Assignment Disables the Solo state for all channel strips driver version 1 20 or later required MUTE Enables disables the Mute state of the channel strip SHIFT Disables the Mute state for all channel strips driver version 1 20 or later required Encoder Controls the parameter chosen with the ENCODERS section SET When encoders are controlling a Send level this combination allows you to set the send destination Fader EQ Section FW 1884 Only Controls the channel strip volume The EQ controls apply to a certain EQ band of the selected channel A Channel or Linear Phase EQ is automatically inserted in the channel if not already present Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Mode Modifier REC GAIN Assignment While REC is held down the SEL buttons activate or deactivate Record Enable for the corresponding channel strip Edits the Gain of the currently selected EQ band SET Selects the channel strip input FREQ Edits the Frequency parameter of the currently selected EQ band SET Selects the channel strip output Edits the Q Factor of the currently selected EQ band SET Selects the channel strip input format HIGH Selects EQ band 6 SHIFT Selects EQ band 8 REC Switches the bypass state of EQ
114. TRACKS button is equivalent to computer keyboard s Period key AUDIO INSTRUMENTS Switch to All view and show software instrument channel strips SHIFT Set to fader bank no 4 channel strips 25 to 32 for example In modal dialog AUDIO INSTRUMENTS button is equivalent to computer keyboard key AUX Switch to All view and show aux channel strips SHIFT Set to fader bank no 5 channel strips 33 to 40 for example In modal dialog AUX button is equivalent to computer keyboard key BUSSES Switch to All view and show bus channel strips SHIFT Set to fader bank no 6 channel strips 41 to 48 for example In modal dialog BUSSES button is equivalent to computer keyboard key OUTPUTS Switch to All view and show output and master channel strips SHIFT Set to fader bank no 7 channel strips 49 to 56 for example In modal dialog OUTPUTS button is equivalent to computer keyboard key USER Currently unassigned SHIFT Set to fader bank no 8 channel strips 57 to 64 for example Mackie Control MODIFIER Buttons While Held Down The following table outlines the modifier buttons and their functions Button Function Comments SHIFT Switch to second function OPTION Apply function to all channel strips or set parameter to minimum default or maximum value CONTROL Disable Group functions while held down CMD ALT Enable Fine mode shif
115. The following table outlines the LCD controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the control name Control Modifier Assignment Left Right buttons Plug in Edit mode Shifts the parameter display to show the next previous page of parameter controls usually four for the selected plug in DAW ALT FINE Plug in Edit mode Shifts the parameter display up down by one parameter for the selected plug in F1 Clears overload LEDs DAW SHIFT ADD Switches the Mixer to the All view displaying all channel strips that exist in your project DAW ALT FINE Opens or closes a second Arrange window Yamaha 01V96 LCD Modal Display Functions The LCD displays different data depending on the page selected with the F2 F3 and F4 buttons Chapter 21 Yamaha 01V96 Insert Display Mode Press the F2 button to select Insert Display mode In this mode the LCD displays parameters allowing you to edit effects This mode also allows you to switch between different Insert slots enabling each effect to be edited Display Assignment TIME CODE Active if counter is displaying SMPTE time code BEATS Active if counter is displaying bars beats divisions ticks Counter Disp
116. Upper e Track Split Lower Sets which track is displayed in the Split Lower section of the control surface for Channel Strip views when Split mode is turned on Track Lock Determines how the control surface responds when a track is selected in Logic Pro in essence this remotely affects the Track and Track Split Lower parameters When set to on the control surface group continues to display the same track independent of the currently selected track in Logic Pro When set to Off the control surface group automatically switches to the selected track whenever a track is selected in Logic Pro Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 25 26 Control Surface Group Other Parameters The parameters at the bottom of the Control Surface Group Parameters area let you set the Track Name Format Parameter Page Shift Mode Relative Change Mode Mix Group and Group Parameter Page parameters Track Name Format Name Parameter Page Shift Mode By Page Relative Change Mode Coarse Mix Group 1 Group Parameter Page 0 Track Name Format Determines whether the track name display shows only the track name or the track name and number Parameter Page Shift Mode Determines whether the parameter is shifted by one page or by one parameter Relative Change Mode Choose the mode for controller assignments that support a Relative Value Change mode rotary encoders for example The choices are Coarse The parameter is adj
117. WN Buttons Selects the desired EQ Send or Insert slot Chapter 14 Mackie C4 BW N Radikal Technologies SAC 2K 15 This chapter describes how to use your Radikal Technologies SAC 2K with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following e Setting Up Your Radikal Technologies SAC 2K p 205 e Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Assignment Overview p 205 e Resolving Issues with Radikal Technologies SAC 2K p 211 Setting Up Your Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Make sure that your control surface is connected bidirectionally with the computer using either a MIDI interface or the unit s USB connector If the units are connected via USB ensure that the appropriate MIDI driver for the device is installed Visit the manufacturer s website to download updated drivers if necessary To set up SAC 2K units Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup Choose Install from the New menu Select the SAC 2K in the Install window Click the Scan button Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Assignment Overview This section outlines the assignment of the Radikal Technologies SAC 2K interface elements to Logic functions e Radikal Technologies SAC 2K LCDs and Encoders e Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Channel Strips Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Mixer View Mode Section Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Software Navigation Section Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Locator Section Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Marker Section 205 206
118. a complete group of eight For example if a project has 19 channel strips and the Mackie Control is controlling channel strips 1 to 8 Pressing the BANK RIGHT button shifts to channel strips 9 to 16 Pressing the BANK RIGHT button again shifts to channel strips 12 to 19 Pressing the BANK LEFT button shifts back to channel strips 9 to 16 not 4 to 11 Chapter 3 Mackie Control This way you always revert to the channel strips you expect to find and are comfortable with Notes on Using the FADER BANKS Buttons When holding down the OPTION button pressing the BANK or CHANNEL LEFT button jumps to the first set of channel strips in the project Pressing the BANK or CHANNEL RIGHT button jumps to the last set of channel strips in the project For example if your project has 64 channel strips pressing BANK or CHANNEL LEFT jumps to channel strips 1 through 8 and pressing BANK or CHANNEL RIGHT jumps to channel strips 57 through 64 For views where one type of channel strip is displayed such as audio instruments or busses Logic Pro remembers the last group of eight channel strips shown in the view and returns to it when you switch back from another view For example if you start in a view with audio channel strips 4 through 11 visible switch to an instruments view scroll to instruments 6 through 13 and then switch back to the audio channel view you will return to audio channel strips 4 through 11 not 6 through 13 Switching to the
119. activating Read Write mode activates Touch mode in Logic Pro Latch mode cannot be activated with these devices To choose an automation mode on the MC Pro Press the Wave and Select keys simultaneously Select the automation mode you want from the pop up menu displayed on the touchscreen You can choose between Isolate Automation mode is off Read Activates Read mode in Logic Pro e Write Activates Write mode in Logic Pro Read Write Activates Touch mode in Logic Pro You can also use the Select key to switch between automation modes in Logic Pro When you set the automation mode to Off or Read the Select key switches between these two modes When you set the automation mode to Read or Touch the Select key switches between these modes To choose an automation mode on a CM408T channel strip Press the Wave and Y keys simultaneously The available automation modes are displayed in a pop up menu on the CM408T display Use the fader of the channel strip to scroll through the following options Isolate Automation mode is Off Read Activates Read mode in Logic Pro e Write Activates Write mode in Logic Pro Read Write Activates Touch mode in Logic Pro Use the Y key to confirm your selection or the N key to cancel the operation Note If a write automation mode Touch Latch Write is active and an automation parameter is enabled in the Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Automation gt Touch Latch Write
120. ader will slide to its top position then back to its bottom or center position This self diagnostic power on procedure indicates that your units are functioning correctly Generally you can turn on your computer and MIDI interface if applicable either before or after you turn on the control surface and open Logic Pro either before or after the control surface is powered up Some devices however may require the computer to be turned on before or after the device has initialized Check the device documentation and manufacturer website Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Adding Control Surfaces to Logic Pro Some control surfaces such as the Mackie Control are detected automatically when you open Logic Pro You can add other devices that are not detected automatically using the Setup window Installation is easy and is covered in the setup section of the chapter for your particular device Some devices may require different or additional steps but generally all you need to do is select the device that you want to use with Logic Pro and then add it either by scanning or manually To add a control surface by scanning Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup to open the Control Surfaces Setup window In the Setup window choose New gt Install and then select the device from the list You can select more than one model by Command clicking multiple entries in the list If you select more than one model L
121. adjust the value if you find that your MIDI or automation playback is being affected Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 28 Touching fader selects track checkbox When this option is selected touching a fader on the control surface selects the track corresponding to the fader For this to work the device must feature touch sensitive faders Control surface follows track selection checkbox When this checkbox is selected selecting a track in the Arrange window automatically selects the corresponding track or channel on the control surface Jog resolution depends on horizontal zoom checkbox When selected the precision of scrubbing using the Jog Shuttle Wheel of your control surface is determined by the horizontal zoom level of Logic Pro Your control surface must feature a Jog Shuttle Wheel or similar control for this to have any effect To retain a consistent resolution regardless of Logic Pro window zoom levels deselect this checkbox Pickup Mode checkbox When selected the control surface operates in Pickup mode if this mode is available Some control surfaces typically those without motorized faders or knobs do not show parameter changes caused by playing back existing automation data on their interface Such control surfaces usually offer a Pickup mode In Pickup mode the controller must reach pick up the current value before the value starts to change This prevents sudden jumps of parameter
122. al then sets the punch out locator to the playhead position Further Jog Wheel use while holding down DROP advances the playhead and sets the punch out locator Shuttles backward Chapter 7 Frontier Design TranzPort 151 152 Control Modifier Assignment SHIFT Goes to last play position PUNCH Engages Autopunch mode and sets punch in locator to playhead position LOOP Engages Cycle mode and sets left locator to playhead position F FWD Shuttles forward PUNCH Engages Autopunch mode and sets punch out locator to playhead position LOOP Engages Cycle mode and sets right locator to playhead position STOP Stop SHIFT Switches Jog Wheel between Move Playhead by bars Scrubbing and Shuttle modes PLAY Play SHIFT Pause RECORD Record SHIFT Save Frontier Design TranzPort External Input The following table outlines the foot switch input control and its assignment Control Assignment Foot Switch Punch In Out Chapter 7 Frontier Design TranzPort N AO WwW A U N JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk 8 This chapter describes how to use your JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk p 153 JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Assignment Overview p 153 Setting Up Your JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Follow the steps below to use your JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk control surface with Logic Pro To add JLCooper CS 32 control surface
123. allows you to update the fader positions to match the actual volume shown in Logic Pro Data wheel AUX 1 LED on controls the Send 1 Level of the selected channel AUX 2 LED on controls the Send 2 Level of the selected channel AUX 3 LED on controls the Send 3 Level of the selected channel AUX 4 LED on controls the Send 4 Level of the selected channel F3 LED on data wheel is in Scrub mode None of the above is lit data wheel is in Transport mode and moves the playhead in one bar increments ASGN Sets currently selected channel s output Tascam US 428 and US 224 LOCATE Section The following table outlines the LOCATE controls and their assignments lt lt LOCATE Moves playhead to previous marker position LOCATE gt gt Moves playhead to next marker position SET Creates a new marker at the current playhead position Tascam US 428 and US 224 BANK Section The following table outlines the BANK controls and their assignments Control Assignment lt BANK Shifts fader bank left by one bank A bank is a group of channels The LED is lit if the leftmost fader bank has not been reached BANK gt Shifts fader bank right by one bank The LED is lit if the rightmost fader bank has not been reached Tascam US 428 and US 224 Transport Section The following table outlines the transport controls and their assignments REW Moves the playhead backward by one bar F FWD Moves the playhead forw
124. an alternate use while the modifier is held down Chapter 18 Tascam FW 1884 229 Control Modifier F1 Assignment Saves the active project The button LED is lit if the project has been edited since the last Save operation SHIFT Opens the Save As dialog F2 Performs an Undo of the last editing operation The button LED is lit when a Redo is possible SHIFT Performs a Redo F3 Copies the current selection of regions or events to the Clipboard SHIFT Cuts the current selection and places it on the Clipboard F4 Pastes the Clipboard contents SHIFT Clears the current selection Master Section FW 1884 FE 8 FW 1082 The following table outlines the master controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Cursor buttons Assignment Identical to but independent of the computer keyboard arrow keys except when encoders are in EQ Plug in or Instrument Edit mode SHIFT Horizontally or vertically zoom in and out of the window with key focus SHTL Enables Shuttle mode for the wheel Wheel Shuttle mode off moves playhead by one bar Shuttle mode on shuttles playhead Bank LEDs Shows currently selected fader bank If you only have an FW 1884 a bank refers to eight channels
125. and 2 AUX 1 4 mode switches Send 3 Position pre post AUX 5 8 mode switches Send 7 Position pre post REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 4 EQ LOW AUX 4 8 EQ PAN mode selects EQ band 3 AUX 1 4 mode switches Send 4 Mute on off AUX 5 8 mode switches Send 8 Mute on off SHIFT EQ PAN mode selects EQ band 1 AUX 1 4 mode switches Send 4 Position pre post AUX 5 8 mode switches Send 8 Position pre post REC Switches bypass state of EQ band 3 EQ PAN Chooses EQ PAN mode SHIFT Enables disables Flip mode With Flip mode enabled the faders control Pan 228 Chapter 18 Tascam FW 1884 Mode Modifier Assignment AUX 1 4 Chooses AUX 1 4 mode AUX 5 8 Chooses AUX 5 8 mode MASTER Fader FW 1884 FE 8 FW 1082 This fader always controls the master volume If no master channel exists it controls Output 1 2 Automation Clock Rate Section FW 1884 Only The following table outlines the automation clock rate controls and their assignments Control Assignment READ While READ is held down SEL buttons are lit if a channel strip is in Read automation mode Pressing the SEL button sets Read mode Turning the encoder also edits the automation mode WRITE While WRITE is held down SEL buttons are lit if a channel strip is in Write automation mode Pressing the SEL button sets Write mode Turning the encoder also edits the automation mode TCH While T
126. and selects LFE level V Pot 4 or F4 Switches to Pan Surround Mixer view and selects Spread V Pot 5 _ V Pot 6 or F5 Switches to Pan Surround Channel view Chapter 3 Mackie Control Control Action V Pot 7 or F6 Switches to Surround Angle Diversity Mixer view The mode display shows Ad Angle Diversity The upper LCD row shows channel strip names The lower LCD row shows the surround angle currently assigned to each channel strip Turning a V Pot changes the surround angle or adjusts pan position on non surround channel strips Pressing a V Pot sets the surround angle to its default value The faders edit surround diversity V Pot 8 or F7 Switches to Surround X Y Mixer view The mode display shows XY The upper LCD row shows channel strip names The lower LCD row shows the surround X value currently assigned to each channel strip Turning a V Pot changes the surround X value or adjusts pan position on non surround channel strips Pressing a V Pot sets surround X to its default value The faders edit surround Y Note X and Y have a value range of 1000 to 1000 but the resolution is not that high as surround positions are currently recorded as 7 bit data Note The X and Y parameters are limited to a rectangular coordinate system As such value pairs outside the surround circle are not possible If you try to set a Y value that is invalid the X coordinate is automatically ad
127. ar that runs from left to right Left to Right Bar Note Feedback only works for supported control surfaces and not all settings are available for all controls Text Feedback Checkbox When selected a text representation of the current value is sent to the control surface s display The control surface display capabilities determine the display position and number of characters that are used Local Feedback Fader Knob Checkbox When selected no feedback is sent while the parameter is in Touch mode This prevents motorized faders from fighting against the user Key Repeat Checkbox When selected the assignment is repeatedly executed The Key Repeat Rate slider set in the Mac OS X Keyboard amp Mouse preferences determines how quickly Logic Pro repeats the assignment The duration that the button controller must be held for before the assignment is repeated is set with the Delay Until Repeat slider in the Keyboard amp Mouse preferences Key Repeat is particularly useful for the zoom function For example if you assign a Key Repeat command to the Mackie Control Zoom buttons holding down the Zoom In button will continuously zoom in the Logic Pro window until the button is released This mirrors the behavior of the Zoom key commands The alternative is to repeatedly press the Mackie Control Zoom buttons to zoom in or out more than one level Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments Note The Key Repeat checkbox i
128. arameter pop up menu also appears below the Group field allowing you to choose the automation group parameter for the assignment For further information see the Group Settings section of the Logic Pro User Manual Editing Input Message Parameters in Expert View The parameters in this section let you control different aspects of MIDI input MIDI Input Pop Up Menu When you choose a MIDI input port from the pop up menu all assignments that use the same input are changed accordingly If the assignment belongs to a supported control surface the device s MIDI input also changes in the Setup window This makes it easy for you to create default assignments for a new control surface These new assignments can be moved to other computers by copying your com apple Logic cs preferences file Simply paste this preference file into the Preferences folder of another computer open the Controller Assignments window in Expert view and change the MIDI Input parameter of one assignment as applicable to the MIDI setup on the other computer Value Change Field Shows incoming MIDI messages that cause a value change in the destination parameter and lets you edit these MIDI messages The Value Change field displays the message as a sequence of hexadecimal bytes The plain language meaning appears below the field The placeholders for the variable part of the message are Lo7 Low 7 bits of the value LSB or Least Significant Bits Hi7 High 7 bits of
129. ard by one bar STOP Stops playback PLAY Starts playback Chapter 20 Tascam US 428 and US 224 Control Assignment RECORD Begins recording Chapter 20 Tascam US 428 and US 224 247 Yamaha 01V96 21 This chapter describes how to use your Yamaha 01V96 with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Yamaha 01V96 p 249 e Yamaha 01V96 Assignment Overview p 250 Setting Up Your Yamaha 01V96 Follow the steps below before using your 01V96 with Logic Pro e Make sure that your 01V96 device is connected to the computer via USB Make sure that the latest USB MIDI driver for the device is installed Visit the manufacturer s website to download the most recent driver version if necessary To set up your system with Logic Pro On the 01V96 front panel a Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the Setup gt MIDI Host page is visible b Use the cursor buttons to move the first DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section and rotate the parameter wheel to select USB and 1 2 c Press the DISPLAY ACCESS REMOTE button repeatedly until the Setup gt Remote page is visible d Rotate the parameter wheel to choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter e Press the LAYER REMOTE button In Logic Pro When you open Logic Pro the 01V96 device is installed automatically You should see two 01V96 icons in the Setup window aligned horizontally 249 250 Yamaha 01V
130. as a volume control Duplicate Assigns both the fader and encoder to the currently selected encoder parameter e Swap Switches the fader and encoder assignments making the fader a pan control and the encoder a channel volume control for example Mute Disables the fader This is useful when recording in the same room as the control surface and you want to avoid the mechanical noise of the faders Any existing automation still functions normally Display Mode Click to limit the device display to only the name or only the value of the current parameter This is helpful if there is insufficient space for the display of both the parameter name and value Clock Display f your control surface features a position display this parameter allows you to determine how the playhead position is represented Click to switch between Beats musical values or SMPTE absolute time values Note The exact elements displayed and thus their positions depend on the selected SMPTE or bar beat display option defined in the Logic Pro Preferences Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 21 Channel Strip View Mode Choose one of the following view modes Arrange The channel strips on the device correspond to Logic Pro channel strips as they appear in the Mixer window The layout of channel strips matches the way tracks are laid out in the Arrange window Channel strip 1 in the Mixer window is equivalent to channel 1 on the control surface chann
131. as well as the latest news on Logic Pro go to e http e com logicstudio logicpro Apple Service and Support Websites For software updates and answers to the most frequently asked questions for all Apple products go to the general Apple Support webpage You ll also have access to product specifications reference documentation and Apple and third party product technical articles e http www apple com support For software updates documentation discussion forums and answers to the most frequently asked questions for Logic Pro go to j apple com support logicpro For discussion forums for all Apple products from around the world where you can search for an answer post your question or answer other users questions go to GISCUSSIONS INTO apple com e http Preface An Introduction to Control Surfaces Basic Control Surface Setup 1 Regardless of the control surface being used you first need to connect add and configure your device for use with Logic Pro This chapter describes the setup procedures and preferences that are common to all control surfaces Setup information for specific devices is covered elsewhere in the documentation Note Read this chapter first and then read through the chapter that pertains to your specific device This chapter covers the following Getting Started p 11 Connecting Control Surfaces p 12 Adding Control Surfaces to Logic Pro p 15 Creating Control Su
132. assignment Control Assignment FADER AUX Enables disables Flip mode Yamaha DM1000 Basic LCD Functions The following table outlines the LCD controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment Left amp Right Tab Scroll Plug in Edit mode shifts the parameter display to buttons show the next previous page of parameter controls usually four for the selected plug in DAW ALT FINE Plug in Edit mode shifts the parameter display up down by one parameter for the selected plug in Yamaha DM1000 LCD Modal Display Functions The LCD display contents reflect the page selected with the F2 F3 and F4 buttons LCD Top Section The following elements are common across all pages in the LCD TIME CODE Active if counter is displaying SMPTE time code BEATS Active if counter is displaying bars beats divisions ticks Counter Displays either SMPTE time code or bars beats divisions ticks Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 271 272 Display Assignment SELECT ASSIGN Displays the encoder assignment as follows Pan Snd1 to Snd8 S1As to S8As In Out Insert Display Mode Press the F2 button to select Insert Display mode In this mode
133. assignment becomes part of the active mode in the same zone that contained the previous inactive assignment Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments This is typically used as follows Supported control surfaces generally have empty user pages available allowing for new encoder assignments You would select a particular user page mode page 3 for example and then learn an assignment for the encoder Using the Control Name and Label Fields The following describes the use and options available for the Control Name and Label fields in the Controller Assignment Parameter area at the top right of the Expert View window Control Name Field Shows the name of the control For supported devices the control surface name is used For assignments created with the Learn process on unsupported control surfaces the control name defaults to Learned You can enter a new name in the field The control name is for display only and has no effect on functionality Label Field For supported control surfaces shows characters that represent the label for the assignment that appears on the control surface display Unsupported control surfaces can only send information not receive it and cannot display an assignment label If the field contains fixed text it can contain any number of characters When used as a placeholder for dynamically created text however the field contains three characters that represent the label The first character is always
134. ats beat subdivisions and ticks When the format is set to SMPTE the four segments of the Time display show the current playhead position as hours minutes seconds and frames You can switch between formats by pressing the SMPTE BEATS button directly below the display You can also set the default format with the Clock Display parameter in the Control Surfaces Setup window Information on this and other configuration options is found in Configuring Your Control Surface Setup Mackie Control Solo LED The Solo LED labeled as Rude Solo on the Mackie Control located at the right edge of the display zone is lit when a channel strip is set to solo or when Solo mode is turned on It is a helpful reminder in situations where you have soloed a channel strip and then switched the fader bank resulting in the Solo LED of the soloed channel strip being hidden on the control surface Mackie Control Display Buttons These buttons located just below the left edge of the Time display affect what you see in the main LCD and Time display NAME VALUE Press the NAME VALUE button to switch between the two parameter display formats either the parameter name or value is shown on the main LCD Chapter 3 Mackie Control 65 66 Pressing the NAME VALUE button while holding the SHIFT button cycles through three level meter modes on the main LCD Vertical In this mode the last character of each channel in both LCD rows is overlaid by a
135. care when manually changing the Min or Max value for a key command in cases where the Min and Max values do not match the button pressed on and button released off states the complete assignment will not work Consult your control surface manual for further information about the values it uses Assigning Buttons to Key Commands In addition to assigning controllers to parameters you can assign control surface buttons and button or key release messages to key commands Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 59 60 To assign a control surface button to a key command 1 Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Key Commands to open the Key Commands window ri In the Command list click the disclosure triangle next to the category whose commands you want to reveal then select the key command you want to assign You can also search for the key command in the Search field 3 Click the Learn New Assignment button Press the control surface button that you want to assign to the key command This sends a MIDI message to Logic Pro The name of the controller appears in the Assignments field 5 You can repeat steps 2 to 4 to make additional assignments if you like When you finish click the Close button to exit the window To assign a button or key release message to a key command Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Key Commands to open the Key Commands window In the Command list click the disclosure
136. changes by pressing the V Select button or all changes will be lost when you leave Send Destination Assignment mode or press the Assign button a second time Mackie HUI Fader Bank Buttons The following table outlines the fader bank controls and their assignments Control Assignment Bank Left Shifts channel strips by one bank a group of channel strips or parameters to the left Bank Right Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right Channel Left Shifts channel strips by one channel or parameter to the left Channel Right Shifts channel strips by one channel to the right Mackie HUI WINDOW Section The following table outlines the window controls and their assignments Control Assignment TRANSPORT Opens or closes the Transport bar window EDIT Opens or closes the Arrange window MIX Opens or closes the Mixer ALT Opens or closes the Sample Editor STATUS Opens or closes the Audio Bin MEM LOC Opens or closes the Marker List Mackie HUI KEYBOARD SHORTCUTS Section The following table outlines the keyboard shortcut controls and their assignments Chapter 13 Mackie HUI Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment UNDO Undoes last editing operation SHIFT ADD Redoes last editing operation OPTION ALL Opens Undo History window
137. chapter presents major features and guides you in trying things out A PDF version of the printed manual is available in Logic Pro Help You can also open the PDF directly in Logic Pro by choosing Help gt Exploring Logic Pro e Logic Pro Control Surfaces Support This onscreen manual describes the configuration and use of control surfaces with Logic Pro Logic Pro TDM Guide This onscreen manual describes the essential aspects of using TDM in Logic Pro e Logic Studio Instruments This onscreen manual provides comprehensive instructions for using the powerful collection of instruments included with Logic Pro and MainStage e Logic Studio Effects This onscreen manual provides comprehensive instructions for using the powerful collection of effects included with Logic Pro MainStage and WaveBurner e Logic Studio Working with Apogee Hardware This onscreen manual describes the use of Apogee hardware with Logic Pro Additional Resources Along with the documentation that comes with Logic Pro there are a variety of other resources you can use to find out more Preface An Introduction to Control Surfaces Release Notes and New Features Documents Each application offers detailed documentation that covers new or changed features and functions This documentation can be accessed in the following location Click the Release Notes and New Features links in the application Help menu Logic Pro Website For general information and updates
138. cle Button Press the Cycle button denoted by two circular arrows to activate Cycle mode If Cycle mode is active pressing the Cycle button deactivates it You can activate Cycle mode and set the left and right cycle locators respectively by using the Rewind or Fast Forward and Cycle buttons together See M Audio iControl Using Locators and Cycle Mode M Audio iControl Using Locators and Cycle Mode The left and right locators are used to mark a section of your project These are often used in conjunction with cycle facilities which repeatedly play back the section of your project between the locators To set the left and right locators and activate Cycle mode Use the Jog Wheel to move the playhead to the desired left locator position then press both the Cycle and Rewind buttons Do one of the following Navigate to the position where you want to set the right locator with the Jog Wheel then press the Cycle and Fast Forward buttons simultaneously e Hold down the Cycle button navigate to the position where you want to set the right locator using the Jog Wheel then release the Cycle button Rotating the Jog Wheel counterclockwise to the left while holding down Cycle defines a skip cycle range M Audio iControl Master Fader Moving the Master fader on the iControl sets the level of the Master fader in the Logic Pro Mixer window The Master fader changes the level of all output channels but does not affect the relative
139. cts the device If any channels are muted soloed or record enabled in the current project the LED on the corresponding channel strip control is lit to reflect the channel strip s status If Cycle mode is active a lit LED also indicates this 15 116 Editing Plug in Parameters Using the M Audio iControl In addition to editing volume pan and other channel strip functions the iControl lets you edit any plug in that can be automated in Logic Pro Many Logic Pro effect and instrument plug ins and those of third party manufacturers feature dozens of parameters You can access each of these parameters with the iControl If a third party plug in that you re using does not support remote editing or other features mentioned in this document contact the plug in manufacturer to obtain an updated version M Audio iControl Assignment Buttons You can use the buttons along the left side of the iControl in the areas labeled All Tracks and Selected Track to select different functions for the rotary encoders located along the right edge in the channel strip area In some cases the channel strip area controls can change the functionality of the Select buttons Volume Button Pressing the Volume button assigns the rotary encoders in the channel strip area to control volume for the eight active channels The channel strip buttons Select Record Enable Mute and Solo work as described in M Audio iControl Channel Strip Controls Pan But
140. d Enable status NULL On if fader is higher than actual channel volume in Logic Pro SELECT 1 to 8 LEDs Displays select status of channel NULL On if fader is lower than actual channel volume in Logic Pro SELECT 1 to 8 buttons Selects channel REC Activates deactivates Record Enable status Fader 1 to 8 Controls channel volume NULL Allows you to update the fader position to match the actual volume in Logic Pro Master fader Controls Master volume fader or Output 1 and 2 if no Master fader channel exists in the project Tascam US 428 and US 224 EQ Section The following table outlines the EQ controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as NULL shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment Gain Controls the Gain of the currently selected EQ band of chosen channel Freq Controls the Frequency of the currently selected EQ band of chosen channel Q Controls the Q Factor of the currently selected EQ band of chosen channel Chapter 20 Tascam US 428 and US 224 Control Modifier HIGH Assignment Selects EQ band 3 allowing use of Gain Freq and Q controls for this band ASGN Switches EQ band 3 bypass state HI MID Selects EQ band 4 allowing use of Gain Freq and Q controls for this band ASGN Switches EQ band 4 bypass state L
141. d folder Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 Yamaha DM2000 Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as USER 4 preassigned to SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment Encoder Adjusts parameter selected in the ENCODER MODE and AUX SELECT sections Encoder Select button Pan selected sets pan to center position If MATRIX 1 on Send 1 to 8 is selected edits Send pre post position activates deactivates Send mute or sets Send level to default value Send Assign Input or Output selected confirms selection AUTO Cycles through automation modes With an automation mode button held down sets this automation mode SEL If ENCODER MODE ASSIGN 4 off selects channel strip If ENCODER MODE ASSIGN 4 on BYPASS off selects channel strip for plug in selection BYPASS on switches bypass state of currently selected Insert slot USER 4 Resets the volume level MATRIX SELECT 1 Resets the volume level SOLO Enables disables the Solo button USER 5 Disables Solo button of all channel strips ON Enables disables the Mute button USER 5 Unmutes all channel strips Channel strip disp
142. destination of a channel strip Press the Mix or Output knob top or key to display all possible mix or output values for the currently selected channel strip Note If using the MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode The value names are displayed on the Soft Keys the touchscreen or the display depending on the system you are using To select the output destination do one of the following Press the knob top that features the name of the mix or output value Press the On key for the relevant mix or output value Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport 138 You can use the Page keys to display ensuing outputs The currently active output is indicated by a lit On key on the MC Professional and MC Mix devices On the MC Control it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the knob image Press the Back key to return to the top level knobset Euphonix Other Features Specific to Logic Pro This section describes other features specific to Logic Pro Layouts Tracks assigned to channel strips can be saved as a Layout This Layout can then be recalled at a later time Any Layouts saved on Euphonix devices are automatically saved with the Logic Pro project Monitors and Control Room Logic Pro does not support EuCon monitoring control Use the Studio Monitor Pro application Track control bar The track control bar of the Logic Pro Arrange area offers a special f
143. ding If you tend to follow a particular song structure or like to work with a particular number of bars 4 8 16 bars and so on for verse and chorus sections then set up a number of markers at suitable locations in your templates Control Surfaces Supported by Logic Pro Following is an alphabetical listing of control surfaces directly supported by Logic Pro The list contains cross references to the relevant device specific chapters Note It is possible that your device may be directly supported in Logic Pro via one or more downloadable support files This is often a driver or plug in supplied by the manufacturer See About Control Surface Plug ins Check the documentation and discs that came with the device and the manufacturer s website Follow any written instructions supplied with the files if available Supported devices Manufacturer Notes 01V96 Yamaha The Yamaha 01V96 emulates two HUI units using two virtual MIDI In and Out connections over its USB cable See Yamaha 01 96 Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Supported devices Manufacturer 01X Yamaha Notes The Yamaha 01X emulates a Mackie Control It does not feature all controls available to the Mackie units however Refer to the 01X documentation for details Logic Pro recognizes the 01X as an 01X and displays a custom icon but communication is as with a Mackie Control unit See Mackie Control 02R96 Yamaha Baby HUI Mackie The Yamaha 02R96 em
144. ding values for zero This results in a value range of 127 to 127 7 bit or 8191 to 8191 14 bit The appropriate format for a device is usually specified in its documentation If unavailable check the control surface manufacturer s website or contact them for more information Multiply Field Enter a scaling value for incoming values This is especially useful for button presses that have a value of 1 For example To set the automation mode to Write set Multiply to 4 00 and Mode to Direct To decrement a parameter by 1 with a button press set Multiply to 1 00 and Mode to Relative Mode Pop Up Menu Choose the mode used by incoming values to modify the current parameter value The choices are Direct The incoming value is used as the parameter value Toggle If the parameter s current value is 0 it is set to the incoming value All other values set the parameter value to 0 This option is useful for buttons that toggle a value Mute Solo and so on Scaled The incoming value is scaled from its value range to the destination parameter s value range This is useful for faders and rotary encoders Relative The incoming value is added to the parameter s current value Used by encoders but also for buttons that increment decrement by a certain amount set by the Multiply parameter Rotate The incoming value is added to the parameter s current value cycling between maximum and minimum values This is
145. disables Cycle mode 10 Enables disables Autopunch mode 11 Enables disables Replace mode 12 Enables disables Solo 13 Record 14 Pause 15 Play 16 Stop 168 Chapter 11 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Solo Mute Mode This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 2 Pad Assignment 1 8 Enables disables Solo for the eight channels being controlled with the eight channel strips 9 16 Enables disables Mute for the eight channels being controlled with the eight channel strips Rec Select Mode This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 3 Pad Assignment 1 8 Activates deactivates the Record Enable button of the eight channels being controlled with the eight channel strips 9 16 Selects one of the eight channels being controlled with the eight channel strips User 4 8 Modes These modes are enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 4 to 8 In these modes the Pads are unassigned Use the Learn function Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Learn Assignment for function name to assign them to key commands for example Note When in Learn mode if a pad is pressed and released immediately the learned assignment does not work as expected To successfully assign a key command Enable the Learn New Assignment button in the Key Commands window Choose a key command then press and hold down the pad until the Learn New Assignment button switches to the up state This slightly different appr
146. e or the EQ In key on the CM408T channel strip e Aux or Sends Pressing the Aux or Sends knob top switches to send editing mode See Euphonix Using the Aux or Sends Configuration Knobset If an Aux or Send is enabled either the On key is lit MC Pro and MC Mix or the knob s image shows a small green LED on the lower left MC Control Pressing the respective On key or knob image switches the bypass state Pan Pressing the Pan knob top switches to pan surround editing mode See Euphonix Using the Pan Surround Knobset Group Pressing the Group knob top switches to group editing mode See Euphonix Using the Group Knobset e Mix or Output Pressing the Mix or Output knob top switches to output editing mode See Euphonix Using the Mix or Output Knobset Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport Euphonix Using the Inserts Configuration Knobset This knobset allows you to Edit an effect plug in Inserts mode Change or insert an effect plug in Inserts Configuration mode Note This knobset only relates to insert effects and not to instrument plug ins Editing Effect Plug ins You edit effect plug ins in Inserts mode using the Inserts knobset To edit an effect plug in Press the Inserts knob top or key to display all effect plug ins inserted in the currently selected channel strip This key is labeled asterisk on the CM408T channel strip Note If using the
147. e HUI AUTO MODE Section Mackie HUI STATUS GROUP Section Mackie HUI EDIT Section Mackie HUI Time Display Mackie HUI LOCATE NUMERICS Section Mackie HUI Transport Section Mackie HUI Cursor Buttons Mackie HUI Jog Wheel Mackie HUI Foot Switches Mackie HUI ASSIGN Section The following table outlines the controls in the ASSIGN section and their assignments Chapter 13 Mackie HU Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier SEND A Assignment Assigns Send 1 level to V Pots and Send 1 to 4 levels to DSP V Pots While SEND A is held down the scribble strips show the current Send 1 destination a bus number SHIFT ADD As above for Send 6 SEND B As above for Send 2 SHIFT ADD As above for Send 7 SEND C SHIFT ADD As above for Send 3 As above for Send 8 SEND D As above for Send 4 SEND E As above for Send 5 PAN Assigns Pan to V Pots and the selected surround channel strip s pan surround parameters to DSP V Pots You must confirm any changes made with the DSP V Pots by pressing the corresponding V Select button INPUT Assigns channel strip input to V Pots While held down the scribble strips show the current channel strip input assignment The four DSP V Pots control the following parameters of the selected channel strip forma
148. e MARKER button and press one or more of the V Pot buttons This action executes the marker function and then leaves Marker mode as soon as you release the MARKER button e When in this mode with the MARKER button held down pressing the function keys F1 to F8 moves the playhead to the first eight markers if created For example to navigate to marker 3 press and hold down the MARKER button and press F3 To jump between markers with or without the MARKER button held down simply press the FAST FWD or REWIND button Mackie Control NUDGE Button The NUDGE button allows you to move nudge selected audio or MIDI regions or events in Small Large or Temporary Nudge mode Note The Marker and Nudge modes are mutually exclusive activating one deactivates the other Small Nudge Mode Pressing the NUDGE button reassigns the behavior of the FAST FWD and REWIND buttons pressing either FAST FWD or REWIND nudges the selected regions or events by the value defined in Large Nudge mode Pressing the NUDGE button a second time reverts to the default behavior of the FAST FWD and REWIND buttons See Mackie Control REWIND Button and Mackie Control FAST FWD Button Small Nudge mode is useful if you want to nudge regions or events but still use the V Pots for other purposes Large Nudge Mode Pressing the NUDGE button while holding down the SHIFT button displays eight functions on the LCD and assigns them to the corresponding V Pot butto
149. e Q factor of band 7 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 20 GAIN 4 Controls the Slope parameter of band 8 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 21 FREQ 4 Controls the Frequency parameter of band 8 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 22 Q 4 Controls the Q factor of band 8 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 24 PAN Controls Pan Balance of mono or stereo channels Tascam US 2400 Master Channel The following table outlines the master channel strip controls and their assignments Control Assignment SEL Selects Master Output channel strip if it exists if not Output channel 1 2 is selected CLR SOLO Disables Solo for all tracks channels SHIFT Disables Mute for all tracks channels F KEY Disables the Record Enable buttons of all tracks channels FLIP Switches Flip mode between Off LED off and Duplicate LED on In this mode the fader of each channel strip mirrors the encoder function Chapter 19 Tascam US 2400 237 Control Assignment SHIFT Sets Flip mode to Swap LED flashing In this mode the parameters controlled by the fader and encoder are swapped F KEY Sets Flip mode to Zero fader motors are disabled LED flashing Tascam US 2400 Encoder Assignment Section The table below outlines the standard assignment of these controls Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a control description indicates tha
150. e SOLO button behaves as per the Solo key command Individual channels can be soloed with the SOLO buttons on each channel strip MIDI or audio regions can be selected and soloed along with the selected channels Each channel features an independent SOLO LED which is lit when a channel strip is soloed The RUDE SOLO LED just to the right of the Position Time display is lit whenever any channel strip is soloed Press the SHIFT and SOLO buttons to activate Solo Lock mode Mackie Control Cursor Key Zone This zone contains five buttons located to the left of the Jog Shuttle Wheel which serve a number of purposes The four cursor buttons Up Down Left and Right encircle the central ZOOM button Mackie Control Normal Operation When the ZOOM button is not active its LED is unlit the four cursor buttons select the current parameter shift the current parameter page or Send EQ Insert slot depending on the current V Pot assignment When the OPTION button is held down the Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons scroll to the first and last page and the Cursor Up and Cursor Down buttons scroll to the first and last slot When the CMD ALT button is held down the Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons shift the parameter display by one parameter rather than one page In view modes that don t require page or slot shifts the cursor buttons emulate the computer keyboard s arrow keys As an example the left and right buttons select channe
151. e assignments are selected operations performed via the Edit menu can be applied to all selected assignments All other operations apply only to the first assignment Controller Assignment Parameter area All aspects of the selected controller assignment parameter are shown and can be changed in this area See Controller Parameter Area Input Message area The port and MIDI input message can be altered Ae Some fields in this section are merely displays and cannot be changed See Input Area Value area The range of values and response of the controller assignment to incoming messages is determined in this area Feedback to the display of control surfaces can also be determined here See Value Area Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments Controller Assignments Window Expert View Settings This section outlines each parameter shown in the fields on the right side of the Controller Assignments window when in Expert view Detailed descriptions of each parameter can be found in Using the Control Name and Label Fields Controller Assignment Parameter Area The area at the top right shows the following parameters Control Name field Displays the name of the controller for supported devices For unsupported devices Learned is displayed See Using the Control Name and Label Fields Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 43 44 Label field Displays characters that represent the label for t
152. e display shows the automation mode of the 16 channel strips in the current bank selection PAIR GROUP Enters Group Edit mode When a channel strip group is selected channel strip membership is indicated by a lit SEL button Use this button to enable disable the channel strip s group membership Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display properties of the currently selected group Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4 enable disable properties of the currently selected group When INSERT PARAM is set to PARAM the left and right Tab Scroll buttons scroll through the group properties When set to INSERT the buttons scroll through the groups for editing Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 Control Modifier DAW SHIFT ADD Assignment Switches the Mixer to the Arrange view displaying all channel strips that correspond to tracks used in the Arrange area along with their signal flow METER Clears overload LEDs DAW SHIFT ADD Switches the Mixer to the All view displaying all channel strips that exist in your project DAW ALT FINE Opens or closes a second Arrange window EFFECT Opens or closes the Sample Editor Yamaha DM1000 AUX SELECT Section The following table outlines the AUX SELECT controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need
153. e selected types To view and edit multiple All View channel strips While holding down any button in the Global View zone press another button to add this channel strip type to those currently displayed If a channel strip type is already displayed pressing its button removes it from the display As an example to display both the audio and output channel strips hold down the AUDIO TRACKS button then press the OUTPUTS button Chapter 3 Mackie Control Mackie Control Modifier Buttons The four Modifier buttons correspond to the modifier keys on your computer keyboard but function independently from them You can use these buttons along with the appropriate key on your computer keyboard or with the mouse in place of using the corresponding modifier key This also applies to modified Mackie Control commands A generic description of each button follows SHIFT Provides an alternate function or meaning for a button e OPTION The function applies to all channel strips For relative value changes sets the value to its minimum default or maximum depending on whether you re increasing or decreasing it CONTROL While held down the group clutch is engaged and channel strip groups are temporarily disabled e CMD ALT Allows fine tuning or another variation of the function Mackie Control Automation Buttons The Automation buttons activate the corresponding automation modes in Logic Pro Read Off Touch Latch and Write
154. e touchscreen or the display depending on the system you are using If a channel strip is associated with more than the first eight groups you can use the Page keys to display ensuing groups Press the knob top that features the name of the group you want to associate the channel strip with When you choose an inactive group number the Group Settings window opens automatically with the channel strip being added to the group When you choose an active group number the channel strip is added directly to the group Tip The On key can also be used to switch between active inactive group membership for the selected channel strip Press the Back key to return to the top level knobset To remove a channel strip from a group Press the Group knob top or key to display the list of groups that the currently selected channel strip is assigned to This key is labeled Grp on the CM408T channel strip Note If using the MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode Press the knob top that features the name of the Group you want to remove the channel strip from That particular channel is removed from the group Tip The On key can also be used to switch between active inactive group membership for the selected channel strip Press the Back key to return to the top level knobset Euphonix Using the Mix or Output Knobset This knobset allows you to change the mix or output destination of a channel strip To change the output
155. eactivates display of the Event List 8 Name Value Switches the display mode between Name and Value identical to the NAME VALUE button on the Mackie Control 9 Track Autom Enables disables display of track automation in the Arrange window 10 Trk gt Rg Autom Performs Move Current Track Automation Data to Region key command With the OPTION button held down display Trk gt Ob Au All the Move All Track Automation Data to Region key command is executed 11 Rg gt Trk Autom Performs Move Current Region Data to Track Automation function With the OPTION button held down display Ob gt Trk Au All the Move All Region Control Data to Track Automation key command is executed 12 Clear Autom Performs Delete Currently Visible Automation Data of Current Track key command With the OPTION button held down display Clear Au All the Delete All Automation Data of Current Track function is performed 13 ClrAll Overld Resets the Level Meter Overload displays 14 ClrAll RecRdy Switches off Record Enable button of all channels 15 CIrAll Solo Switches off Solo for all channels 16 ClrAll Mute Switches off Mute for all channels 17 Tool Pointr Chooses the Pointer tool 18 Tool Pencil Chooses the Pencil tool 19 Tool Scissr Chooses the Scissors tool 20 Tool Glue Chooses the Glue tool 202 Chapter 14 Mackie C4 Control Assignment 21 Tool Text
156. eature on the Euphonix devices it shows attentioned tracks in blue Note The color of the track control bar cannot be changed in the Control Surfaces Setup window Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport BW N CM Labs Motormix 6 This chapter describes how to use your CM Labs Motormix with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following e Setting Up Your CM Labs Motormix p 139 CM Labs Motormix Assignment Overview p 139 Setting Up Your CM Labs Motormix Follow the steps below to use your CM Labs Motormix control surface with Logic Pro To set up your CM Labs Motormix control surface in Logic Pro Ensure that your Motormix unit is connected bidirectionally with the MIDI interface Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup Choose Install from the Setup window s New menu Select Motormix in the Install window click Add then set the appropriate MIDI In and Out ports in the Setup window CM Labs Motormix Assignment Overview Assignments of CM Labs Motormix interface elements to Logic functions are covered in the following sections e CM Labs Motormix Select Buttons CM Labs Motormix Rotary Pots CM Labs Motormix Multi Buttons CM Labs Motormix Burn Buttons CM Labs Motormix SOLO Buttons CM Labs Motormix MUTE Buttons CM Labs Motormix VIEW Section CM Labs Motormix Left Function Buttons 139 e CM Labs Motormix Faders e CM Labs Motormix R
157. ection The following table outlines the numeric key controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT shown below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment SYSTEM Switches SI 24 to System mode See SI 24 user manual for details LOCATE Switches numeric keys to Locate mode SHORT CUT Switches numeric keys to Shortcut mode SCREEN SET Switches numeric keys to Screenset mode Chapter 17 Roland S 24 219 220 Control Modifier 0to9 Assignment System mode See SI 24 user manual Locate mode 1 to 9 Moves playhead to marker 1 to 9 positions 0 Creates marker at playhead position Shortcut mode 1 Saves project LED is lit if project has changed since last save 2 Performs Undo of last editing operation LED is on if a Redo is possible 3 Copies the selection of regions or events 4 Pastes the Clipboard contents 5 Deletes the selection 6 Enables disables Scrub mode LED is on if Scrub mode is enabled 7 Enables disables Cycle mode LED is on if Cycle mode is enabled 8 Enables disables Autopunch mode LED is on if Autopunch mode is enabled 9 Switches Arrange window to Hyper Draw volume view 0 Switches Arrange window to Hyper Draw pan view Screenset mode 1 to 9 Recall screensets 1 to 9 0 Enables disables Lock Screenset command
158. ed to the right of the Solo button The function assigned to the encoders changes when different Assignment buttons are pressed See M Audio iControl Assignment Buttons Pressing the Option button while turning a rotary encoder regardless of the active assignment mode switches between the parameter s minimum default and maximum values Chapter 4 M Audio iControl 119 120 M Audio iControl Mixer View and Channel View The rotary encoders operate in two views Mixer view and Channel view The view you re in determines whether the rotary encoders and in some cases the Select buttons edit multiple channels or a single channel Mixerview Accesses the same parameter for eight channel strips such as pan or volume normally a section of the Mixer window e Channel view Accesses eight parameters of the selected channel strip To access Mixer or Channel view press one of the Assignment buttons For more information about using the Assignment buttons see M Audio iControl Assignment Buttons Functions M Audio iControl Jog Wheel You can navigate through projects with the Jog Wheel located toward the lower left area of the iControl just above the transport controls Turning the wheel clockwise moves the playhead forward Turning it to the left moves the playhead backward M Audio iControl Transport Controls The transport controls at the bottom left corner of the iControl feature six large buttons Record Return to Zero
159. el strip or channel strip group to Touch automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Touch DAW OPTION ALL Sets all channel strips to Touch automation mode DAW AUTO LATCH Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Latch automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Latch DAW OPTION ALL Sets all channel strips to Latch automation mode DAW AUTO READ Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Read automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Read DAW OPTION ALL Sets all channel strips to Read automation mode DAW AUTO TRIM DAW AUTO OFF Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Off automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Off DAW OPTION ALL Sets all channel strips to Off automation mode Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 277 Control Modifier Assignment DAW AUTO STATUS While held down in Channel Display mode the display shows the automation mode of the 16 channel strips in the current bank selection 278 Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 Yamaha DM2000 24 This chapter describes how to use your Yamaha DM2000 with Logic Pro This chapter cove
160. el strip 2 in the Mixer is equivalent to channel 2 and so on Instruments and channels used by multiple tracks are merged into one channel This is the default mode of most devices including the Mackie Control All The channel strips on the device correspond to Logic Pro channel strips of certain types such as MIDI or aux channels independent of their use in tracks Control surfaces that support this view mode generally allow you to define which channel types you want to display The contents of Logic Pro s Mixer window automatically follow the state of the control surface provided that the View gt Link Control Surfaces option is turned on Tracks This view mode is similar to Arrange view mode but individual channel strips are shown when multiple arrange tracks address the same channel Typically this will be an instrument channel with several tracks routed to it Single This mode shows a single channel and its routing to auxes and so on You can determine which parameters the channel strip controllers on the control surface will edit Note Keep in mind that the View mode is a property of the control surface group not a global setting One group can display busses while the other shows tracks for example Fader Bank for Tracks View Drag vertically or enter an integer value to offset which tracks are controlled by the channel strips of the device in Tracks view For example if your device has eight channel strips
161. eled Sends Mixer Mackie C4 Send Channel View Mode In Send Channel view e Row 1 edits the first eight send destinations of the selected channel strip e Row 2 edits the send level of sends 1 to 8 e Row 3 edits send positions 1 to 8 pre post fader Row 4 mutes unmutes sends 1 to 8 e TRACK L and TRACK R switch to the previous or next channel To access Send Channel view Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays Press V Select 28 labeled Sends Mackie C4 Effect Assign Mixer View Mode In Effect Assign Mixer view the C4 displays the first four Insert slots of the eight selected channels Turn a V Pot to switch between effects This action lets you browse through the effects listed in the Effect menu shown in Logic Pro mixer channels e Press the respective V Select to insert the chosen effect This activates Effect Edit view where you can directly edit effect parameters See Mackie C4 Effect Edit View Mode for more information Chapter 14 Mackie C4 195 196 The SLOT UP SLOT DOWN buttons switch between Insert slots TRACK Land TRACK R shift the fader bank by the number of channel strips in the control surface group Holding down SHIFT and pressing a V Select switches the bypass state of the respective Insert slot Bypassed effects are denoted by an asterisk that precedes the effect name To access Effect Assign Mixer view 1 Hold down the CHAN
162. ent Mixer view unless the Mackie Control is currently in Plug in Edit view In this case pressing the INSTRUMENT button switches to Instrument Edit view Chapter 3 Mackie Control If you can t see the software instrument channel strips use the BANK or CHANNEL buttons in the Fader Bank zone or switch to All view by pressing the INSTRUMENT button This assumes that you have created at least one or more software instrument tracks Instrument Mixer View In this mode you can view and edit the Instrument slots of all channels The mode display shows In for instrument The upper LCD row shows channel strip names The lower LCD row shows the currently selected instrument Muted instrument names are preceded by an asterisk Turning the V Pots preselects a new instrument The preselected instrument name flashes until activated Turning another channel s V Pot cancels any previous preselection and starts preselection on the newly chosen channel strip Pressing a V Pot button Activates the preselected instrument plug in assuming that you ve made your preselection by turning the V Pot Opens a plug in window if none is opened If a plug in window is open and Link mode is turned on the selection of another instrument plug in replaces the existing one e Switches to Instrument Edit view Pressing a V Pot or MUTE button while holding down the SHIFT button mutes unmutes the instrument To remove an
163. ent Same as Audio setting for software instrument channel strips Bus Same as Audio setting for bus channel strips Auxiliary Same as Audio setting for auxiliary channel strips Output Same as Audio setting but for output channel strips Master The Master channel strip if it does not exist in the project the first output channel strip is addressed If you choose the Fader Bank Index Audio Software Instrument Bus Auxiliary Output or Master setting in the Channel Strip pop up menu the following two parameters become available Number field A 0 based offset which is added to the channel strip number The typical use for this field is for sequential controls Fader 1 uses offset 0 Fader 2 uses offset 1 and so on Parameter field Text description of the addressed parameter Can only be set by choosing the Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Learn Assignment for parameter name menu item Note that for plug in and instrument parameters Parameter Page offsets apply allowing you to shift the parameter addressing up and down by page Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 53 54 Key Choosing the Key class lets you use assignments to emulate keystrokes on your computer keyboard You can enter the key to emulate in the Key field which appears below the Class pop up menu This is not case sensitive Key Command Choosing the Key Command class lets you use an assignment to perform a key command You can enter the ke
164. ents do not provide parameter names or values as text In such cases parameters are named and enumerated as Control 1 Control 2 and so on with values displayed as numbers ranging between 0 and 1000 Contact the plug in manufacturer to obtain a version that supports this feature Mackie Control Fader Bank Zone This Mackie Control zone contains two sets of left and right buttons for switching between individual or grouped channels as well as the FLIP and GLOBAL VIEW buttons Mackie Control BANK LEFT and BANK RIGHT Buttons The Mackie Control provides eight sets of channel strip controls allowing you to edit eight corresponding channels The BANK LEFT and BANK RIGHT buttons let you move between banks of eight channel strips For example if you are editing channel strips 1 8 pressing the BANK RIGHT button moves to channel strips 9 16 Pressing BANK RIGHT again moves to channel strips 17 24 Pressing BANK LEFT returns to channel strips 9 16 then to 1 8 with one more button press If you are using a control surface group the BANK LEFT and BANK RIGHT buttons shift the active channel strips by the total number of channels in the control surface group For example if you have a Mackie Control and two Mackie Control XT units the view shifts by 24 channels the total number of channels in the control surface group The BANK buttons always change channel strips in groups of eight unless the last channel strips do not make
165. er 4 100 with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 p 161 JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 Assignment Overview p 162 Setting Up Your JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 Follow these steps before using your FaderMaster 4 100 control surface with Logic Pro Ensure that your FaderMaster 4 100 MIDI or USB version has firmware version 1 03 or later installed Important If you have older firmware see the sticker on the back of the unit contact JLCooper USB model only Install the software that comes with the FaderMaster 4 100 Ensure that your FaderMaster 4 100 devices are connected to the computer via USB or MIDI If connected via USB installation is automatic To install units connected via MIDI Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup Choose Install from the New menu Select FaderMaster 4 100 from the list in the Install window Click the Scan button Note You can combine several FaderMaster 4 100 devices to form one large virtual control surface The meaning and functionality of the Track buttons however are individually switched for each device 161 162 JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 interface elements to Logic functions JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 Global Buttons e JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 Channel Strip JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 Gl
166. er bank by one channel If BANK LED is on shifts the fader bank by one bank a group of 8 channels SHIFT In Effect and Instrument Plug in Edit modes shifts the parameter bank by one parameter In Group Edit mode the group parameter bank is shifted bank Switches mode of left right buttons see above SHIFT Sets Select buttons to Channel View mode group Sets Select buttons rotary encoders and Multi buttons to Group Edit mode SHIFT Displays channels group assignments in the LCD The rotary encoders allow you to change assignments CM Labs Motormix Left Function Buttons The following table outlines the left function button controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier AUTO ENBL mode Assignment Currently unassigned SHIFT Switches rotary encoders to Automation Enable mode SUSPEND create SHIFT While held down the groups are temporarily disabled Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode PLUG IN compare Switches rotary encoders and Multi buttons to Effect Assign mode Use the Rotary Select knob to choose the Insert slot you want to edit In Effect or Instrument Assign mode it switches to Pan mode In Effect Edit mode it switches to Effect Assign mode In Instrument Edit mode it swi
167. er keyboard Num Switches the numeric buttons between primary and secondary function see above Enter Equivalent to Enter key on the computer keyboard Note All buttons that are equivalents of computer keyboard keys are independent of the computer keys Either can be reassigned Chapter 15 Radikal Technologies SAC 2K 209 210 Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Locator Section The locator displays the current playhead position in bars beats format as defined in the project settings A period separates display segments as the bars beats format uses up to 14 characters in Logic Pro and the SAC display is limited to 8 digits Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Marker Section The following table outlines the marker section controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment SHIFT Shifts to secondary function of other buttons Scrub Switches between three Jog Wheel modes LED off Moves playhead by one bar LED on Activates Scrub mode LED flashes Activates Shuttle mode From Sets left locator at the current playhead position SHIFT Moves the playhead to the left locator position Store Marker Creates a marker at the current playhead position SHIFT Deletes the marker at the current playhead position To Sets right locator at the c
168. er row of the LCD shows the currently selected plug in for the active Insert slot Muted plug ins are shown with an asterisk that precedes the plug in name Turning the V Pots preselects a new plug in The plug in name flashes until confirmed by pressing the V Pot button Turning another channel s V Pot cancels any earlier preselection and starts preselection on the newly selected channel strip Pressing a V Pot button Confirms or activates the preselected plug in assuming that you ve made your preselection by turning the V Pot Opens a plug in window if none is opened If a plug in window is open and Link mode is turned on the selection of another plug in replaces the existing plug in window e Switches to Plug in Edit view The Cursor Up Cursor Down buttons change the currently displayed plug in Insert slot 1 to 15 Pressing a V Pot or MUTE button while the SHIFT button is held down mutes or unmutes the plug in Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons To remove a plug in Preselect the value by turning the V Pot fully counterclockwise then press the V Pot button of the appropriate Insert slot The Mackie Control does not switch to Plug in Edit view and no plug in window opens when the value is chosen If a plug in window is open it closes if Link mode is inactive Chapter 3 Mackie Control Plug in Channel View This mode shows the plug
169. es that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment DISPLAY When DISPLAY is held down in Channel Display mode the display shows the automation mode of the channel strips in the current bank selection REC Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Write automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Write USER 5 Sets all channel strips to Write automation mode ABORT UNDO Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Touch automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Touch USER 5 Sets all channel strips to Touch automation mode Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 285 286 Control Modifier AUTOREC Assignment Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Latch automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Latch USER 5 Sets all channel strips to Latch automation mode RETURN Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Read automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Read USER 5 Set
170. es the rotary pot controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment Rotary pots 1 to 8 Control parameter chosen with the Rotary Selector as displayed in the 7 segment display see below Chapter 6 CM Labs Motormix 141 142 Control Modifier Assignment 7 segment display Shows current selection for rotary pots Send EQ editing S MUTE or PRE PST LED is on S1 to S8 Send 1 to 8 level F1 to F8 EQ band 1 to 8 frequency G1 to G8 EQ band 1 to 8 gain q1 to q8 EQ band 1 to 8 Q factor Pan Surround editing select LED is on Pn Pan An Surround Angle dv Surround Diversity FE Surround LFO Sp Surround Spread X Surround X Y Surround Y Channel parameter editing eff 4 LED is on VL Volume Pn or An Pan Surround Angle FM Channel input format In Channel input assignment Ou Channel output assignment Au Automation mode Gr Group membership Assignment d1 to d8 Assign Send 1 to 8 destination Effect editing DSP compare LED is on P1 to 15 Assign Insert slot 1 to 15 to effect P1 to 15 Effect parameter editing Instrument editing DSP compare LED is on IA Assign instrument to Instrument slot IE Instrument parameter editing Group property edit
171. es to the first parameter assign fader 1 to control volume for channel strip 1 for example Assign the last controller in the series to the last parameter assign fader 16 to control volume for channel strip 16 for example The number of controllers between the first and last in the series must match the number of parameters between the first and last parameter In the example the distance between 1 and 16 would equal 15 A Do you want to fill up in between dialog appears Click OK to automatically fill the controllers between the first and last with the corresponding assignments Note You can only use shortcuts for knobs that send a single channel message where the first data byte is the controller number and the second data byte is the value Alternatively the controller number can be encoded in the MIDI channel with a fixed first data byte Consult the documentation that came with your device for information on its data structure Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments Controller Assigments Working in Expert View You can use Expert view to make advanced controller assignments These include Logic Pro parameters other than channel strip and plug in parameters For example you can assign controllers to global automation and control surface group parameters in Expert view You can also extensively edit controller assignments in Expert view and define zones and modes which let you switch between groups of controlle
172. ess the Input knob top or key to display all possible channel input values for the selected channel strip Note If using the MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode The input values are displayed on the Soft Keys the touchscreen or the display depending on the system you are using You can use the Page keys to display ensuing input values Press the knob top that features the name of the channel input value you want to set The currently active input value is indicated by a lit On key on the MC Professional and MC Mix devices On the MC Control it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the knob image Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport Setting an Audio Channel Strip s Input Format You set an audio channel strip s input format in Input Configuration mode using the Input Configuration knobset To set a channel strip s input format Press the Input knob top or key Note If using the MC Mix press the CHAN key to enter Channel mode Press both Page keys simultaneously to switch to Input Configuration mode The selected channel strip s input format values Mono Stereo Left Right Surround are displayed The currently active format value is indicated by a lit On key on the MC Professional and MC Mix devices On the MC Control it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the knob image Press the respective knob top to choose the i
173. eter is available Horizontal Zoom Sets horizontal zoom in the key focus window if this parameter is available Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments Global options Explanation Vertical Zoom Sets vertical zoom in the key focus window if this parameter is available Channel Strip Choosing the Channel Strip class lets you use an assignment to set a channel strip parameter A Channel Strip pop up menu appears below the Class pop up menu offering the following parameters Channel strip type Explanation Selected track Normally corresponds to the selected Arrange track Exception If the control surface group s Track Lock parameter is active the selected track is the one that was chosen when Track Lock was enabled Fader Bank Addresses a channel strip in the control surface group s current View mode Arrange All Tracks Single This is dependent on the current Fader Bank value for this mode see below Example The View mode is All the All view Fader Bank is five and the number next to this parameter is two Thus the eighth channel strip in the All view is addressed Fader Bank and No are 0 based so add 1 Index Same as the Fader Bank setting but doesn t depend on the current Fader Bank value Audio An audio channel The numerical value No determines which audio channel is addressed again 0 based to address audio channel 2 use a value of 1 Software Instrum
174. eter area of the Setup window to match those of the connected unit Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 15 16 Note You can reinitialize the support of all connected control surfaces by choosing Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Rebuild Defaults Creating Control Surface Groups If you have multiple control surface units in your system you can define how they relate to each other and create control surface groups A control surface group consists of multiple devices that you combine to create a single unified virtual control surface You can create up to 20 control surface groups Each group can consist of any number of physical devices The only limiting factor is the number of available MIDI In and Out ports or USB FireWire MIDI ports if you are using a USB or FireWire control surface You can independently determine the default behavior of each device in a group For more information see the Device Parameters section To create a control surface group Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup to open the Control Surfaces Setup window In the Setup window drag the icons of the control surfaces you want to group so that they form a single horizontal row The order of the icons from left to right defines the order in which tracks and parameters are arranged and displayed on the devices To use two control surfaces independently Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences
175. ext tool e 5 Scissors 6 Glue tool 7 Solo tool 8 Mute tool 140 Chapter 6 CM Labs Motormix Mode Assignment PLAY transport button flashes Transport section mode 1 Record 2 Pause 3 Stop 4 Play 5 Rewind 6 Fast Forward Upper LCD row displays current playhead position STOP locate button flashes Locate mode 1 Goes to left locator 2 Goes to right locator 3 Enables or disables Cycle mode 4 Enables or disables Autopunch mode 5 Enters Marker mode see below 6 Opens Marker List Upper LCD row displays current playhead position Marker mode 1 to 6 Select markers 1 to 6 Marker names are displayed in the upper LCD row 7 Creates a new marker 8 Deletes selected marker Group Edit mode Switches between group parameters Parameter display can be shifted by the View left and right buttons when the SHIFT button is held down Effect Assign mode Enters Effect Edit mode for the selected channel Effect Edit mode Enables disables the selected parameter or resets it to the default value Instrument Assign mode Enters Instrument Edit mode for the selected instrument channel Instrument Edit mode Enables disables the selected parameter or resets it to the default value Note In modal dialogs the Select buttons generate the computer keyboard character shown on the button face CM Labs Motormix Rotary Pots The following table outlin
176. ey Repeat Gears Mode Mode list In Expert view the Controller Assignments window contains the following fields menus and buttons that you use to edit assignment parameters and define zones and modes e Zone list Displays the available zones for the device The first entry No Zone is for zoneless assignments assignments that are always active regardless of the active zone Select a zone in the list to see its modes in the Mode list and its current assignments in the Control Parameter list You can also double click a zone to rename it See Getting to Know Zones and Modes Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 41 42 Modelist Displays the modes for the currently selected zone The first entry No Mode is for modeless assignments Select a mode in the list to see its assignments in the Control Parameter list and make it the selected zone s active mode You can also double click a mode to rename it See Getting to Know Zones and Control Parameter list Select the assignment you want to edit The left column displays the name of the control and the right column displays the name of the parameter being controlled in an abbreviated form The ene of the selected ae ane in the fields to the right of the list See C Jr Setting trolle Expert Note You can select multiple assignments in the list but only the parameters of the first selected assignment are displayed When multipl
177. fault assignments of the F1 to F7 buttons on the Mackie Control open screensets 1 to 7 in Logic Pro You can reassign these control surface buttons to other Logic commands either alone or in conjunction with the Command Shift Option and Control modifier buttons on the control surface in any combination 37 You can assign controllers to parameters in Logic s Controller Assignments window using the Learn process The Controller Assignments window has two views a compact Easy view where you can assign channel strip and plug in parameters and the more extensive Expert view where you can create and edit any type of controller assignment including global automation and control surface group assignments Controller Assignments Working in Easy View Easy view allows you to see and assign controllers to channel strip and plug in parameters and to change the track that assignments apply to To open the Easy view of the Controller Assignments window Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Controller Assignments or use Command k and click the Easy View button anA Controller Assignments P Easy View Expert View gt Parameter Channel Strip mery input message l The Easy view of the Controller Assignments window contains the following fields and buttons Expert View button Click to open the editor in Expert view Back Forward buttons Click to move back and forth betwee
178. fault value See description of other buttons DAW GROUP STATUS Enters Group Edit mode When a channel strip group is selected channel strip membership is indicated by a lit SEL button Use this button to enable disable the channel strip s group membership Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display properties of the currently selected group Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4 enable disable properties of the currently selected group When INSERT PARAM is set to PARAM the left and right Tab Scroll buttons scroll through the group properties When set to INSERT the buttons scroll through the groups for editing DAW SHIFT ADD Switches the Mixer to the Arrange view displaying all channel strips that correspond to tracks used in the Arrange area along with their signal flow The channel strips on your DM1000 device will also reflect the Arrange Channel Strip View Mode DAW SUSPEND GROUP Enables disables the Group Clutch DAW SHIFT ADD Switches the Mixer to the Arrange view displaying all channel strips that correspond to tracks used in the Arrange area along with their signal flow The channel strips on your DM1000 device will reflect the Tracks Channel Strip View Mode and not the Arrange DAW CREATE GROUP Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode see above DAW SHIFT ADD Switches the Mixer to the All view displaying all channel strips that exist in your project The
179. fier button such as SHIFT shown below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment INPUT Shows the first 12 audio input channel strips SHIFT Shows the first 12 MIDI channel strips OUTPUT Shows the first 12 output channel strips 1 Output 1 2 default surround assignment front 2 Output 3 4 default surround assignment rear 3 Output 5 default surround assignment center 4 Output 6 default surround assignment LFE 5 Output 7 8 digital out SHIFT Shows the first 12 audio channels BUS Shows the first 12 aux channels SHIFT Shows the first 12 instrument channels Tr 1 to 12 Switches to Arrange view and shows the first 12 channels 218 Chapter 17 Roland S 24 Modifier Assignment Switches to Arrange view and displays channel 13 to 24 Control Tr 13 to 24 Roland SI 24 MASTER Section The following table outlines the master fader control and its assignment Control Assignment Master fader Controls the master channel strip Roland SI 24 SURROUND PAN Section The following table outlines the surround pan controls and their assignments Control Assignment ON OFF Switches selected channel output between Surround LED on Out 1 2 LED off Also shows hides the Surround Pan window Joystick Surround X Y of selected channel Roland SI 24 Numeric Key S
180. for details on each view mode e Mackie C4 Pan Surround Mixer View Mode e Mackie C4 Pan Surround Channel View Mode e Mackie C4 Channel Strip Mixer View Mode e Mackie C4 EQ Mixer View Mode e Mackie C4 EQ Channel View Mode e Mackie C4 Send Mixer View Mode e Mackie C4 Send Channel View Mode e Mackie C4 Effect Assign Mixer View Mode e Mackie C4 Effect Edit View Mode e Mackie C4 Instrument Assign Mixer View Mode e Mackie C4 Instrument Edit View Mode Chapter 14 Mackie C4 e Mackie C4 Cycle View Mode e Mackie C4 Punch View Mode Mackie C4 Pan Surround Mixer View Mode In Pan Surround Mixer view e Row 1 edits pan surround parameter 1 e Row 2 edits pan surround parameter 2 e Row 3 edits pan surround parameter 3 e Row 4 edits pan surround parameter 4 in this order pan angle diversity LFE spread X Y SINGLE Left Right changes the parameter edited in row 1 thus affecting the parameters shown and edited in rows 2 to 4 To access Pan Surround Mixer view Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays Press V Select 18 labeled Surrnd Mixer Mackie C4 Pan Surround Channel View Mode In Pan Surround Channel view row 1 edits all eight surround parameters of a surround channel If a stereo or mono channel is selected V Pot 1 edits the Pan or Balance parameter To access Pan Surround Channel view Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel stri
181. gnments Control Assignment Encoder Adjusts parameter selected in the AUX SELECT section Encoder Select button Pan selected sets pan to center position If EFFECTS PLUG INS PLUG INS on Sends 1 to 8 is selected edits Send Pre Post switches Send Mute status or sets Send Level to default value Send Assign Input or Output confirms selection AUTO Cycles through automation modes When an automation mode button is held down sets this automation mode Chapter 22 Yamaha 02R96 263 Control Assignment SEL If EFFECTS PLUG INS CHANNEL INSERTS off selects channel If EFFECTS PLUG INS CHANNEL INSERTS on chooses channel for plug in selection insertion SOLO Enables disables Solo button ON Enables disables Mute button Fader Adjusts volume or duplicates Encoder in Flip mode Yamaha 02R96 MACHINE CONTROL Section The following table outlines the controls in the MACHINE CONTROL section and their assignments display Opens or closes the Marker tab in the Lists area 1to8 Recalls markers 1 to 8 REW Shuttles backward FF Shuttles forward STOP Stop PLAY Play REC Record Yamaha 02R96 Data Entry Section The following table outlines the data entry controls and their assignments SCRUB Enables disables Scrub mode SHUTTLE Enables disables Shuttle mode Parameter Wheel Default adjusts the value of the currently selected parameter Scrub Scrub mode Shuttle
182. gt Control Surfaces gt Setup to open the Control Surfaces Setup window In the Setup window arrange the icons for the control surfaces in separate rows that is one above the other Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Pictured below is a multiple group example with two Mackie Controls three Mackie Control XTs and one HUI The top row consisting of the Mackie Control 1 Mackie Control XT 1 and Mackie Control XT 2 forms a single control surface group with 24 channels Mackie Control 1 controls channels 1 to 8 XT 1 controls channels 9 to 16 and XT 2 handles channels 17 to 24 In the second row the Mackie Control 2 and Mackie Control XT 3 form a second control surface group controlling instruments on channels 1 to 8 and auxes on channels 9 to 16 In the third row the HUI forms a single unit control surface group Each group has individual settings such as Flip mode Display mode Plug in Parameter Bank Offset and others This allows you to access edit and automate different sections of the Logic Pro Mixer In the example above the three units in the top row could be used to control audio and MIDI channel strips In the second row Mackie Control 2 could be used to control instrument channel strips 1 to 8 and XT 3 could be used to control aux channel strips 1 to 8 The HUI could be used to edit group definitions The physical placement of units and the way you use them is completely flexible N
183. ha DM2000 281 282 Control Assignment PAN Assigns pan surround control to encoders In Insert Display mode assigns pan surround parameters of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders In Channel Display mode assigns pan surround parameters of the 16 channel strips in current bank selection to virtual encoders AUX MTRX Assigns Send level control to encoders In Insert Display mode assigns Send level parameter of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders In Channel Display mode assigns Send level parameters of the 16 channel strips in current bank selection to virtual encoders ASSIGN 1 Assigns channel strip input assignment to encoders While held down the channel strip display shows the current channel strip input assignment ASSIGN 2 Assigns channel strip output assignment to encoders While held down the channel strip display shows the current channel strip output assignment ASSIGN 3 When encoders display a Send level switches them to Send Destination assignment mode Press the encoder button or ASSIGN 3 again to confirm the assignment ASSIGN 4 Determines mode of channel strip SEL buttons e Indicator off SEL button used for channel strip selection Indicator on SEL button used for insert selection or insert bypass depending on MATRIX SELECT MATRIX 4 Yamaha DM2000 FADER MODE Section The following table outlines the FADER MODE controls and their assignments Control
184. hannel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 24 PAN Controls Panning In CHAN mode with the SHIFT button held down the encoders control the following parameters on the selected channel Control Assignment Encoder 1 AUX 1 Controls Pan Surround Angle Encoder 2 AUX 2 Encoder 3 AUX 3 Controls Surround LFE level Controls Surround Radius Encoder 4 AUX 4 Encoder 5 AUX 5 Controls Surround Spread Controls Surround X Chapter 19 Tascam US 2400 Control Assignment Encoder 6 AUX 6 Controls Surround Y Encoder 11 GAIN 1 Controls the Slope parameter of band 1 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 12 FREQ 1 Controls the Frequency parameter of band 1 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 13 Q 1 Controls the Q factor of band 1 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 14 GAIN 2 Controls the Gain parameter of band 2 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 15 FREQ 2 Controls the Frequency parameter of band 2 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 16 Q 2 Controls the Q factor of band 2 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 17 GAIN 3 Controls the Gain parameter of band 7 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 18 FREQ 3 Controls the Frequency parameter of band 7 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 19 Q 3 Controls th
185. he manufacturer s website to download the most recent driver version if necessary To set up your system with Logic Pro On the 02R96 device a Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the Setup gt MIDI Host page is visible b Use the cursor buttons to move to the first DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section and rotate the parameter wheel to select USB and 1 2 c Press the DISPLAY ACCESS DIO SETUP button repeatedly until the Setup gt Remote page is visible d Rotate the parameter wheel to choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter e Press the LAYER REMOTE button In Logic Pro When you open Logic Pro the 02R96 device is installed automatically You should see three 02R96 USB 1 3 icons in the Setup window aligned horizontally 259 Yamaha 02R96 Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Yamaha 02R96 interface elements to Logic functions Yamaha 02R96 DISPLAY ACCESS Section e Yamaha 02R96 AUX SELECT Section e Yamaha 02R96 ENCODER MODE Section Yamaha 02R96 FADER MODE Section Yamaha 02R96 EFFECT PLUG IN Section Yamaha 02R96 LCD Yamaha 02R96 USER DEFINED KEYS Section Yamaha 02R96 Channel Strips Yamaha 02R96 MACHINE CONTROL Section Yamaha 02R96 Data Entry Section Yamaha 02R96 DISPLAY ACCESS Section The following table outlines the DISPLAY ACCESS control assignment Control Assignment METER Clears overload LEDs Yamaha 02R96 AUX
186. he Euphonix documentation for more information about the individual control surfaces This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Euphonix Device with Logic Pro p 125 Euphonix Changing the Track Display p 126 Euphonix MC Professional Setting Up Soft Key Assignments p 127 Euphonix Choosing Automation Modes p 128 Euphonix Understanding the Fader Strips p 129 Euphonix Opening and Closing Plug in Windows p 129 Euphonix Getting to Know Knobsets p 130 Euphonix Other Features Specific to Logic Pro p 138 Setting Up Your Euphonix Device with Logic Pro Depending on the specific Euphonix device you have the setup process varies Follow the steps below to use your Euphonix device with Logic Pro 125 126 Note EuCon support in Logic Pro works in a different way to the support of other control surface devices As a consequence you cannot use the Controller Assignments window to change assignments See the documentation provided with your Euphonix device for information on the use of parameters and device features EuCon devices do not appear in the Control Surfaces Setup window To set up your MC Professional device for use with Logic Pro Set up your device as described in the Euphonix user documentation Install the latest EuCon software on your computer If necessary go to the Euphonix website to download the most recent version Note Installing EuCon software on the MC Professional de
187. he Solo button DAW OPTION ALL Disables Solo button of all channel strips ON Enables disables the Mute button DAW OPTION ALL Unmutes all channel strips Fader Adjusts volume or duplicates encoder assignment in Flip mode Yamaha DM1000 Stereo Channel Strip The following table outlines the stereo channel strip control and its assignment Control Assignment AUTO Switches channel strip SEL buttons between channel and insert selection duties Yamaha DM1000 USER DEFINED KEYS Section These keys can be assigned to the following functions Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment DAW WIN STATUS Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab in the Media area Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 Control Modifier DAW REC RDY 1 to 16 Assignment Enables disables the Record Enable button of the specified channel strip DAW WIN TRANSPORT Opens or closes the Transport bar window DAW BANK Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left DAW BANK DAW SHIFT ADD Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right Enables a second function use for some buttons DAW OPTION ALL DAW GROUP STATUS While held down Value Change mode is se
188. he assignment on the control surface s display You can view this much like a scribble strip on a mixer See Using the Control Name and Label Fields Flip Group field Enter an integer to define a flip group for the assignment See Setting tha Elin Grain and Eveliuewa Daramarar the Filp Group ana Exclusive Parameters Class pop up menu Choose the class of parameter parameter type you want to assign See Setting Class Pop Up Menu Parameters Note Depending on the chosen class different fields and pop up menus for that class appear below the Class pop up menu Parameter Mode pop up menu and field Depending on your choice in the Class pop up menu you can choose from dozens of different parameters and modes The options available change as different classes are selected Group Track Command Key field pop up menu These options also change depending on your choice in the Class pop up menu Bank Type pop up menu This pop up menu determines the bank relationship of the assigned parameter This can be as per the Group setting By One or By Bank Input Message Area The area at the center right shows the following parameters See Editing Input Message Parameters in Expert View for details MIDI Input pop up menu Choose a MIDI input source MIDI Port or Caps Lock Keyboard This can be changed by incoming MIDI messages shown in the Value Change field Value Change field Displays incoming MIDI messages that cause a
189. he currently selected parameter DAW SHUTTLE Switches the parameter wheel to Shuttle mode DAW SCRUB Switches the parameter wheel to Scrub mode DEC button Default exits folder In Go to Marker dialog cancels dialog DAW ALT FINE Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab in the Media area INC button Enters the selected folder Yamaha 01V96 Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Chapter 21 Yamaha 01V96 Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the control name Control Modifier Assignment SEL Using DAW AUTO OFF FADER MODE AUX 8 off selects channel FADER MODE AUX 8 on selects channel for insert assignment allowing you to insert effects Using the DAW AUTO automation modes WRITE TOUCH LATCH READ Cycles through automation modes Sets the selected mode when an automation mode button is held down DAW SHIFT ADD Resets the volume level SOLO Enables disables the Solo button DAW OPTION ALL Disables the Solo button of all channel strips ON Enables disables the Mute button DAW OPTION ALL Unmutes all channel strips Fader Adjusts volume or duplicates encoder assignment in F
190. hes Mute Solo 1 to 8 buttons between Mute and Solo modes LED off Mute Solo buttons switch Mute state on off LED on Mute Solo buttons switch Solo state on off LED flashes Mute Solo buttons switch Record Enable state on off SHIFT Sets Mute Solo buttons to Record Enable mode Mute Solo 1 to 8 Mute Solo LED off Enables disables Mute LED displays Mute status Mute Solo LED on Enables disables Solo LED displays Solo status Mute Solo LED flashing Enables disables Record Enable LED displays Record Enable armed disarmed status SELECT 1 to 8 buttons Selects channel Exception In Group mode these buttons define group membership of the channel Master Select button Switches Flip mode between Off and Duplicate Chapter 15 Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Control Faders 1 to 8 Modifier Assignment Controls volume or duplicates the parameter assigned to the encoder above if Flip mode is enabled Master Fader Controls the Master Level fader if it exists if not controls Output 1 2 level EQ button Inserts a Channel EQ in the channel if no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Mixer View Mode Section The following table outlines the Mixer view mode controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control
191. hile held down Pads switch between Pad functions and channel views See Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Pads EXIT HEX LOCK Shifts fader bank to the previous eight channels LED is on if previous channels exist Shifts fader bank to the previous eight parameters in Effect Edit or Instrument Edit view ENTER Shifts fader bank to the next eight channels LED is on if subsequent channels exist Shifts fader bank to the next eight parameters in Effect Edit or Instrument Edit view lt Octave Shift Down gt Octave Shift Up Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Channel Strips There are several modes for the encoders enabled with SCENE and Pad 9 16 Control Assignment LCD Shows the parameter controlled by the encoder The current name value is displayed for a few seconds when you move an encoder or fader When the encoders are in a Mixer view Pan Send Send Setup the background color indicates the channel automation mode Green Off or Read Yellow Touch or Latch Red Write Encoder Controls the parameter shown directly above the encoder in the LCD Fader Controls volume As the faders don t offer feedback Pickup mode is used if enabled in the Control Surfaces preferences This means that the fader must reach pick up the current parameter value before the value starts to change Chapter 11 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 171 172 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 External Input The follow
192. ialog disappears and all controls and displays return to their previous state When a File Open dialog appears onscreen the There is a file select dialog on the screen message appears on the LCD or other display if your control surface has one Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 32 Control Surface Usage Tips You may find that using control surfaces changes the way you use Logic Pro Slight changes to your working methods can help you to use control surfaces more effectively The following hints may streamline your Logic Pro control surface workflow Customize Your Templates Set up screensets 1 7 as your most frequently used screensets You can access these directly on some control surfaces On a Mackie Control for example you can access them with function keys F1 to F7 while function key 8 F8 closes the topmost window Itis recommended that you assign a full screen Arrange window with track automation view set to On for all tracks as one of your screensets A full screen Mixer window is also recommended as another screenset Make Use of Markers Markers allow you to quickly navigate from location to location in a project Most control surfaces feature a number of shortcuts that allow you to rapidly move between markers which is an extremely useful way of moving around in your projects Markers are also useful for creating or selecting cycle areas and a number of other tasks such as punch and replace recor
193. icks SELECT ASSIGN Displays the Encoder assignment as follows Pan Snd1 to Snd8 S1As to S8As In Out Chapter 22 Yamaha 02R96 Yamaha 02R96 USER DEFINED KEYS Section The following table outlines the USER DEFINED KEY controls and their assignments Control Assignment Display While held down the display shows the automation mode of the channel strips in the current bank selection 1 Switches between the Arrange window and the Mixer 2 Enables disables the Group Clutch 3 Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Write automation mode 4 Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Touch automation mode 5 Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Latch automation mode 6 Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Read automation mode 8 Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Off automation mode 9 Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left 10 Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right 11 Enables disables volume automation playback and recording 12 Enables disables mute automation playback and recording 13 Enables disables pan automation playback and recording 14 Enables disables send level automation playback and recording 16 Enables disables plug in parameter automation playback and recording Yamaha 02R96 Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assi
194. ight Function Buttons CM Labs Motormix Select Buttons The Select buttons buttons just below the LCD have multiple uses depending on the current mode Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Mode Assignment Normal Selects channel displayed in upper LCD line Channels can be shifted to the left and right with the View left and right buttons Bank button LED flashing Channel View mode Select buttons switch between displayed channel strips 1 Switches to Single view 2 Switches to Arrange view 3 All view MIDI channels 4 All view input channels 5 All view audio channels 6 All view instrument channels 7 All view aux and bus channels 8 All view output and master channels WINDOW tool button LED on Window Select mode Select buttons open assign key focus or close a particular window type LED off If the window is not open the button opens it LED on If the window is open but does not have key focus the button activates it LED flashes If the window has key focus the button closes it 1 Arrange window e 2 Mixer e 3 Event List 4 Score Editor 5 Hyper Editor 6 Piano Roll Editor 7 Transport Bar window 8 Audio Bin WINDOW tool button flashes Select Tool mode Select buttons choose a tool 1 Pointer 2 Pencil 3 Eraser 4 T
195. ignment Up Zooms out vertically SHIFT In Effect Edit mode moves up one Insert slot unless top slot is selected Down Zooms in vertically SHIFT In Effect Edit mode moves down one Insert slot unless bottom slot Left Zooms out horizontally SHIFT In Instrument and Effect Edit modes decrements current parameter bank moves down one bank or page of parameters Right Zooms in horizontally SHIFT In Instrument and Effect Edit modes increments current parameter bank moves up one bank or page of parameters JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Transport Section The following table outlines the transport controls and their assignments Control Assignment RECORD Record STOP Stop REW Moves playhead backward by one bar Chapter 8 JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Control Assignment PLAY Play F FWD Moves playhead forward by one bar JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Jog Wheel Section The following table outlines the Jog Wheel controls and their assignments Control Assignment Jog Wheel SCRUB off Moves playhead in bar increments SCRUB on Scrubbing of audio and MIDI is possible SHUTTLE on Shuttle mode SCRUB Switches Jog Wheel between Move Playhead by bars and Scrubbing modes SHUTTLE Switches Jog Wheel between Move Playhead by bars and Shuttle modes Chapter 8 JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk 159 BW N JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 9 This chapter describes how to use your JLCooper FaderMast
196. iguration mode The Logic Pro Instruments Plug in menu appears Press the Page keys to display ensuing plug ins If an instrument plug in is already inserted the On key is lit on the MC Professional and MC Mix devices On the MC Control it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the knob image Choose the instrument you want Pressing the knob top activates a submenu or inserts a selected instrument plug in Pressing the Back key navigates up one level in the menu hierarchy Euphonix Using the EQ Knobset This knobset allows you to edit the first Channel or Linear Phase EQ inserted in the selected channel strip There are two pages each showing four EQ bands on eight knobs One page contains the parameters of EQ bands 1 2 7 and 8 One page contains the parameters of EQ bands 3 4 5 and 6 When no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected channel strip pressing the knob top labeled AddChEQ inserts a Channel EQ To edit an EQ plug in Press the EQ knob top or key to display the EQ bands of the EQ plug in inserted in the currently selected channel strip Note The MC Mix automatically switches to Channel mode The EQ band parameters are displayed on the Soft Keys the touchscreen or the display depending on the system you are using You can use the Page keys to display ensuing parameters Turn the respective knob to change the parameter value Pressing a knob top sets the controlled
197. ilencing motorized control surface faders when recording in the same room It is also handy when troubleshooting MIDI data errors or for reducing MIDI bandwidth requirements General Preferences General control surface preferences include resolution of relative controls maximum MIDI bandwidth and other functions C Bypass All while in background Resolution of Relative Controls i Maximum MIDI Bandwidth ____ 50 _ C Touching fader selects track M Control surface follows track selection C Jog resolution depends on horizontal zoom mM Pickup Mode F Flash Mute and Solo buttons Multiple Controls per Parameter f2 3 For longer labels and value displays M only when all parameters fit on one page Show value units For M instrument plug in parameters mM Volume and other parameters BypassAll while in background checkbox Allows you to share your control surface with other applications when Logic Pro is not the active program e Resolution of Relative Controls slider Sets the resolution of controls that change values in a relative manner The default resolution is 128 steps Choose a higher resolution value to divide the value range into finer increments e Maximum MIDI Band Width slider Drag to set the maximum amount of MIDI bandwidth that your control surface can use This is set to a default of 50 which should be suitable for most situations You can
198. in Assignment mode Chooses Insert slot 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Edit mode Sets value Channel Display Mode Press the F3 button to select Channel Display mode In this mode the parameter controls such as pan and send level for channel strips 1 to 16 are displayed Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 Control Assignment Selecting virtual encoders 1to4 When Send 1 to 8 is selected edits Send pre post fader position Use cursor keys and then press enables or disables Send mute or sets Send level to default value ENTER button Send Input or Output Assignment mode confirms selection Moving virtual encoders 1to4 Adjusts parameter selected in the ENCODER MODE and AUX SELECT Use cursor keys and then rotate sections parameter wheel Meter Display Mode Press the F4 button to select Meter Display mode In this mode the level meters for channel strips 1 to 16 are displayed Control Assignment Level Meters Display momentary and peak level Yamaha DM1000 Data Entry Section The following table outlines the data entry controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment Parameter wheel Default adjusts the value of the
199. in Logic Pro Install the latest version of the driver software needed for the US 428 or US 224 Ensure that your US 428 or US 224 units are connected to the computer via USB Open Logic Pro The unit is scanned for and installed automatically Tascam US 428 and US 224 Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Tascam US 428 and US 224 interface elements to Logic functions Tascam US 428 and US 224 Channel Strips Tascam US 428 and US 224 EQ Section Tascam US 428 and US 224 Master Section Controls Tascam US 428 and US 224 LOCATE Section Tascam US 428 and US 224 BANK Section Tascam US 428 and US 224 Transport Section 243 244 Note The US 224 only offers four channel strips and transport controls and lacks the EQ and Master sections excluding the NULL button and data wheel of the US 428 Many operations listed below are specific to the additional controls of the US 428 and cannot be performed with the US 224 Tascam US 428 and US 224 Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as NULL shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment MUTE 1 to 8 SOLO LED off switches Mute on off LED displays Mute status SOLO LED on switches Solo on off LED displays Solo status REC 1 to 8 LEDs Displays Recor
200. ines the foot switch controls and their assignments Control Assignment Foot Switch 1 Play or Stop Foot Switch 2 Record On Off Chapter 13 Mackie HU Mackie C4 1 4 This chapter describes how to use your Mackie C4 with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Mackie C4 p 191 Mackie C4 Using V Pots and V Select Buttons p 191 Mackie C4 View Modes p 192 Mackie C4 Function Buttons p 199 Mackie C4 Assignment Buttons p 199 Mackie C4 Modifier Buttons p 203 Mackie C4 Parameter Track and Slot Buttons p 203 Setting Up Your Mackie C4 A connected and powered Mackie C4 unit will be detected automatically when you open Logic Pro You can use the C4 in an independent control surface group with other control surface icons placed above or below the C4 icon or combined in a group with one or more control surfaces such as the Mackie Control place the icon to the right or left of the existing icons Although the C4 can be used independently it is most useful when combined with other control surfaces particularly the Mackie Control In this scenario the C4 adds eight channels in Mixer view Using the C4 in its own control surface group allows you to edit instruments and effects independently while performing mixing and other tasks on the Mackie Control or other control surface Mackie C4 Using V Pots and V Select Buttons The C4 provides 32 V Pots laid out in four horizontal
201. ing group LED is on G1 to 32 group number Rotary Selector Selects a slot or parameter for rotary encoders depending on the parameter types being edited with the rotary encoders Send slot when editing send level or assigning send destination EQ band when editing an EQ parameter Effect Instrument slot when assigning an effect or instrument Pan Surround parameter when editing a Pan Surround parameter Channel parameter when editing a channel parameter Effect instrument parameter page when editing an effect or instrument plug in Chapter 6 CM Labs Motormix Control Modifier Assignment Rotary Selector push Switches Flip mode between Off and Duplicate button faders mirror the rotary encoder assignments SHIFT Switches the channel strip display mode between Page info in upper line parameter name in lower line Parameter name in upper line parameter value in lower line CM Labs Motormix Multi Buttons These buttons labelled A to H have multiple uses depending on the current mode as indicated by the green and yellow LEDs to the right Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down UO G Modifier Assignment fx bypass Enables disables bypass of currently selected insert effect SHIFT eff 1 Enables disables bypass of currently selected EQ band and switches rotary e
202. ing overwritten WRITE Overwrites all existing automation data or creates new automation data if none exists Only use this option if you want to destroy all existing automation data Pressing one of the Automation buttons while holding down the OPTION button assigns the selected automation mode to all channels When an automation mode has been assigned to all channels the corresponding automation mode button LED illuminates whenever you hold down the OPTION button Important This behavior is slightly different for the Off automation mode When holding down the OPTION button and pressing Read Off the LEDs for the other Automation buttons are unlit but this does not necessarily indicate that all channel strips are in Off mode they could still be set to other modes To ensure that you have set all channel strips to Off mode press Read Off twice while holding down the OPTION button The Read Off button LED turns on then off Mackie Control GROUP Button Pressing the GROUP button activates Group Edit mode allowing you to edit various Mixer group parameters In Group Edit mode The upper row of the LCD displays channel strip names The lower row of the LCD displays group parameters The Assignment display shows the currently displayed group G1 for example The Time display shows the group name If the name is longer than ten characters the last ten characters are displayed You can switch between group parameters with
203. ing table outlines the external input controls and their assignments Control Assignment Foot Switch Starts and stops playback Pedal Controls the master fader Chapter 11 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 _ Oo uu A WwW N Mackie Baby HUI 12 This chapter describes how to use your Mackie Baby HUI with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Mackie Baby HUI p 173 e Mackie Baby HUI Assignment Overview p 173 Setting Up Your Mackie Baby HUI Baby HUI control surface units do not support automatic scanning You need to manually add these devices to your setup When you add a device in this way you need to specify the MIDI In and Out port parameters To set up Mackie Baby HUI units Make sure that your Baby HUI units are connected bidirectionally with the computer using a MIDI interface Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup Choose New gt Install in the Setup window Select the Baby HUI in the Install window Click the Add button Select the added device in the Setup window then assign the MIDI Input and MIDI Out parameters as appropriate Mackie Baby HUI Assignment Overview Assignments of Mackie Baby HUI interface elements to Logic functions are covered in the following sections e Mackie Baby HUI Channel Strips e Mackie Baby HUI Encoder Assignment Section e Mackie Baby HUI Automation Section e Mackie Baby HUI Display Section 173 174
204. ins associated with all Insert slots for the selected channel The mode display shows the text PL The upper LCD row shows Ins1PI through Ins8PI The lower LCD row shows the plug in that is currently selected for this Insert slot Muted plug ins are indicated by an asterisk which precedes the plug in name Turning the V Pots preselects a new plug in The plug in name flashes until activated e Turning another channel s V Pot cancels any previous preselection and starts preselection on the newly selected channel strip Pressing a V Pot button Activates the preselected plug in assuming that you ve made your preselection by turning the V Pot Opens a plug in window if none is opened If a plug in window is open and Link mode is turned on the selection of another plug in replaces the existing plug in Switches to Plug in Edit view Pressing a V Pot button while the SHIFT button is held down mutes unmutes the plug in To remove a plug in Preselect the value by turning the V Pot fully counterclockwise then press the V Pot linked to the appropriate Insert slot The Mackie Control does not switch to Plug in Edit view and no plug in window opens If one was previously opened it closes if Link mode is inactive Plug in Edit View You can view and edit plug in parameters in this mode The mode display shows P1 to P8 indicating the number of the selected plug in Insert slot
205. isplayed in EQ Channel Strip view The Channel and Linear Phase EQs feature eight bands per audio channel with each band offering four parameters All of these parameters can be accessed with your control surface Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 23 24 Split no of upper parameter 0 Inst Param Page Split Lower 0 Plug in Param Page Split Low 0 Channel Strip Track Split Low 262145 If your control surface does not display all EQ parameters at once you view them by stepping through the parameter pages in sequence For example if your control surface has eight channel strips you can directly control parameters 1 to 8 with knobs or sliders 1 to 8 when you switch to EQ Channel Strip Edit view You then need to switch by a page to access parameters 9 to 16 Control Surface Group Send and Plug in Parameters The parameters in the middle of the Control Surface Group Parameters area let you control different operational aspects when working with Send and Plug in parameters Send Slot 1 Send Parameter Destination Send Parameter Page 0 Instrument Parameter Page 0 Insert Slot 1 Insert Slot Split Lower 1 Plug in Parameter Page 0 Channel Strip Track 262145 Track Lock e Send Slot Sets the currently selected Send slot The default is 1 which sets the first top Send on each channel as the Send slot A value of 2 sets the second send as the Send slot a value of 3 the third Send slot and
206. ith an asterisk that precedes the button name Control AUX 1 Modifier Assignment In Insert Display mode Assigns Send 1 level of channel strips to encoders Assigns Send 1 level of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Assigns Sends 1 to 4 of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Use the ENTER button to switch the bypass state of Sends 1 to 4 In Channel Display mode Assigns Send 1 level of channel strips to encoders and virtual encoders Shows current Send 1 destination assignment when button is held down USER 4 Same as AUX 5 but for Send 6 AUX 2 Same as AUX 1 but for Send 2 USER 4 Same as AUX 5 but for Send 7 AUX 3 Same as AUX 1 but for Send 3 USER 4 Same as AUX 5 but for Send 8 AUX 4 Same as AUX 1 but for Send 4 AUX 5 Para In Insert Display mode Assigns Send 5 level of channel strips to encoders Assigns Send 5 level of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Assigns Sends 5 to 8 of the selected channel strip to virtual encoders Use the ENTER button to switch the bypass state of Sends 5 to 8 In Channel Display mode Assigns Send 5 level of channel strips to encoders and virtual encoders Shows current Send 5 destination assignment when button is held down Yamaha DM2000 ENCODER MODE Section The following table outlines the ENCODER MODE controls and their assignments Chapter 24 Yama
207. itional hardware that is not included with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up the Recording Light p 213 Changing Recording Light Parameters p 213 Setting Up the Recording Light The Recording Light needs to be manually added to your setup To set up the Recording Light Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup Choose Install from the New menu Select the Recording Light from the list in the Install window Click the Add button Note While the Recording Light can be added anywhere it is suggested that you use it alone in a unique control surface group Changing Recording Light Parameters As the Recording Light hardware is not actually a control surface but rather a simple MIDI controlled display device all changes to its behavior are made in the Device Parameter area at the left of the Setup window You can adjust most of the following parameters if necessary Out Port Choose the MIDI output port from the pop up menu 213 214 Input Choose the MIDI input port from the pop up menu Module Shows the name of the control surface plug in Recording Light which cannot be changed Model Shows the model name of the control surface Recording Light which cannot be changed Version Shows the firmware version for some control surfaces Not applicable to Recording Light Color Not applicable to Recording Light MIDI Status Choose the type of MID
208. itor is open it closes If Hyper Editor is closed it opens AUX 6 Switches encoders to Mixer view of Send 6 level F KEY Switches display of Piano Roll Editor If Piano Roll Editor is open it closes If Piano Roll Editor is closed it opens Instrument Edit View In Instrument Edit view the following AUX buttons have special assignments AUX 1 Scrolls parameter fader bank left by 24 parameters AUX 2 Scrolls parameter fader bank right by 24 parameters AUX 4 Enables disables Bypass button of the instrument being edited The AUX button LEDs show the currently selected parameter bank AUX 2 LED is on if parameters 25 to 48 are shown on the encoders Plug in Edit View In Plug in Edit view the following AUX buttons have special assignments AUX 1 Scrolls parameter fader bank left by 24 parameters AUX 2 Scrolls parameter fader bank right by 24 parameters AUX 3 Increments Insert slot chooses higher numbered slot AUX 4 Enables disables Bypass button of the plug in being edited AUX 6 Decrements Insert slot chooses lower numbered slot The AUX button LEDs show the currently selected Insert slot For example AUX 2 LED is on if Insert slot 2 is being edited Tascam US 2400 Master Section The following table outlines the master section controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or u
209. justed to a valid position and vice versa As an example moving Y to 1000 will result in an X coordinate value of 0 When only one coordinate value is edited the other coordinate value defaults to the setting of the most recently selected channel strip This helps you to create linear movements Mackie Control EQ Button Pressing the EQ button activates EQ Mixer view Pressing the button repeatedly switches between EQ Mixer view and EQ Channel view Note If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected channel strip a Channel EQ is inserted automatically when you enter EQ Channel view EQ Mixer View EQ Mixer view allows you to edit one equalizer parameter for all channel strips Frequency Gain Q or EQ bypass The EQ band number and parameter being edited are displayed briefly when you switch to this mode The mode display shows E1 to E8 indicating the selected EQ band The upper LCD row shows channel strip names Chapter 3 Mackie Control 75 76 Turning the V Pots changes the current EQ parameter e Pressing a V Pot button sets the parameter to its default value Cursor Up Cursor Down switches to the next or previous EQ band Cursor Left Cursor Right switches to the next or previous EQ parameter The selected parameter is displayed briefly in the upper LCD row Pressing a MUTE button while holding down the SHIFT button switches the current EQ band s Bypass status When Flip mode is turned on
210. l strips when in Mixer view In Large and Temporary Nudge modes the Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons emulate the computer keyboard s arrow keys allowing easy region or event selection Mackie Control Zoom Mode Pressing the ZOOM button activates Zoom mode The cursor buttons are then used to change the vertical or horizontal zoom factor of the window with key focus In the Arrange window OPTION and Cursor Up or Cursor Down changes the zoom factor of the selected track OPTION and Cursor Left resets the zoom factor of the selected track OPTION and Cursor Right resets the zoom factor of all tracks of the same class audio MIDI and so on as the selected track Chapter 3 Mackie Control 99 100 Mackie Control Computer Arrow Key Emulation To use the cursor buttons as a replacement for the computer keyboard arrow keys hold down the SHIFT button When SHIFT and ZOOM are pressed the cursor buttons enter Permanent Cursor Key mode they mimic the computer arrow keys without the need to hold down the SHIFT button The ZOOM button LED flashes when in this mode You can deactivate this mode by pressing the ZOOM button Mackie Control Jog Scrub Wheel Zone The Jog Scrub Wheel and SCRUB button can be used to navigate through the project which is useful for a number of transport tasks Simply turn the dial to use it The following Scrub modes change the behavior of the Jog Scrub Wheel Scrub mode off The Jog Scrub Wheel mo
211. l Modifier Assignment BYPASS OFF Sets selected channel to Off automation mode Chapter 12 Mackie Baby HUI Control Modifier Assignment SHIFT Enables or disables playback and recording of level volume automation READ Sets selected channel to Read automation mode SHIFT Enables or disables playback and recording of mute automation WRITE Sets selected channel to Write automation mode SHIFT Enables or disables playback and recording of pan automation TOUCH Sets selected channel to Touch automation mode SHIFT Enables or disables playback and recording of send level automation Mackie Baby HUI Display Section The following table outlines the display controls and their assignments TRANSPORT Opens or closes the Transport bar window MEM LOC Opens or closes the Marker List MIXER Opens or closes the Mixer EDIT Opens or closes the Arrange window Mackie Baby HUI Utility Section The following table outlines the utility controls and their assignments Control Assignment UNDO Undoes the last editing step SHIFT Shifts to alternate use of some buttons Mackie Baby HUI Navigation Section The following table outlines the navigation controls and their assignments Note If SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment RTZ Navigates to the left locator SHIFT
212. l Send slot Ifin Insert mode switches to Mixer view plug in selection for Inserts 1 to 4 Plug in selection is confirmed by pressing the encoder s push button While held down use Encoder 9 to choose the desired Insert slot number 1 to 15 The button s LED is lit when in Plug in Selection mode of the corresponding channel Insert slot Audio Switches to Mixer view and displays audio channels SHIFT Switches to Mixer view MIDI Switches to Mixer view and displays MIDI channel strips SHIFT Switches to Arrange Track view and displays the channel strips of all tracks used in the Arrange window Input Switches to Mixer view and displays input channels SHIFT Switches to Mixer view and displays the master and output channels Inst Switches to Mixer view and displays software instrument channels SHIFT Switches to Mixer view and displays aux channels Bus Switches to Mixer view and displays bus channels SHIFT Switches to Single view Group Switches to Group editing mode Encoder 1 to 10 push buttons edit a group property The property is shown in the LCD s lower line Encoder 11 scrolls through group properties Encoder 12 selects a group to edit Its name is displayed in the lower LCD line above Encoder 12 Select buttons 1 to 8 activate deactivate group membership of the channel 208 Chapter 15 Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Control Modifier Assignment
213. l of Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Assignment mode Chooses Insert slot 1 to 4or5 to 8 Plug in Edit mode Sets value Yamaha DM2000 LCD The following table outlines the LCD assignments Display Assignment TIME CODE Active if counter is displaying SMPTE time code Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 BEATS Active if counter is displaying bars beats divisions ticks Counter Displays SMPTE time code or bars beats divisions ticks SELECT ASSIGN Displays the encoder assignment as follows Pan Snd1 to Snd8 S1As to S8As In Out Yamaha DM2000 TRACK ARMING Section The following table outlines the TRACK ARMING controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as USER 4 preassigned to SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment 1 to 24 Enables disables the Record Enable button of the specified channel strip USER 5 Disables the Record Enable buttons of all channel strips MASTER Disables the Record Enable buttons of all channel strips Yamaha DM2000 AUTOMIX Section The following table outlines the AUTOMIX controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as USER 4 preassigned to SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicat
214. l strips on Euphonix devices Open the Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup window and change the Channel Strip View mode in the Control Surface Group 1 menu Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport Euphonix MC Professional Setting Up Soft Key Assignments The Logic Pro xml Application Set file installed with the EuCon software on your MC Professional device features a number of useful Soft Key assignments It is possible to edit these assignments To change a Soft Key assignment on your MC Professional device Press the Setup button in the lower right corner of the Soft Keys section on the device Select the respective Soft Key by pressing it Choose the desired EuCon command in the menu Logic Pro supports the following EuCon commands Key Commands All Logic Pro key commands except the transport commands are found here The touchscreen uses the same hierarchy as the Key Commands window Many of these key commands switch between states on off for example or set a value Most also provide feedback on the Soft Key for example a Soft Key assigned to the Open Close Score Editor command is illuminated when a Score Editor window is open Left Wheel Right Wheel The commands found here allow you to configure the left or right wheel to perform a certain action when turned This includes horizontal or vertical zoom waveform zoom individual track zoom move locators
215. lay Displays channel strip name or send input or output assignment Fader Adjusts volume or duplicates encoder assignment in Flip mode Yamaha DM2000 USER DEFINED KEYS Section The following table outlines the USER DEFINED KEY controls and their assignments Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 289 290 Note A modifier button such as USER 4 preassigned to SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier DISPLAY Assignment Opens or closes the Audio Bin window 1 Opens or closes the Transport bar window Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right 2 3 4 Shifts to second function use of some buttons See descriptions of other buttons While held down Value Change mode is set to Full Turning the encoder to the right sets the maximum value Turning it to the left sets the minimum value The encoder also stops at its default value Also see description of other buttons Enters Group Edit mode When a channel strip group is selected channel strip membership is indicated by a lit SEL button Use this button to enable disable channel strip s group membership Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display properties of the currently
216. lays either SMPTE time code or bars beats divisions ticks SELECT ASSIGN Displays the encoder assignment as follows Pan Snd1 to Snd8 S1As to S8As In Out COMPARE Switches the display between track name parameter name and parameter name parameter value modes BYPASS Switches the bypass state of plug in currently being edited INSERT PARAM Switches between Plug in Assign and Plug in Edit modes Selecting virtual encoders 1to4 Pan Assignment mode Use cursor keys and then press Parameter control 1 button centers pan or surround angle ENTER button Parameter control 2 button centers surround diversity Parameter control 3 button centers surround LFE level Parameter control 4 button resets spread Send Assignment mode Enables disables Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Assignment mode Confirms the plug in selection for Insert slots 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and enters Plug in Edit mode for the selected Insert slot Plug In Edit mode Sets value to default or switches buttons with two states Moving virtual encoders 1to4 Pan Assignment mode Use cursor keys and then rotate Parameter control 1 edits pan or surround angle parameter wheel Parameter control 2 edits surround diversity Parameter control 3 edits surround LFE level Parameter control 4 edits spread Send Assignment mode Controls the Send level of Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Assignment mode Chooses Insert s
217. les disables Shuttle mode DAW REW Shuttles backward DAW FF Shuttles forward DAW STOP Stop DAW PLAY Play DAW SHIFT ADD Pause DAW REC Record DAW PRE Sets the left locator at current playhead position DAW IN Sets the punch in locator at current playhead position DAW OUT Sets the punch out locator at current playhead position DAW POST Sets the right locator at current playhead position Chapter 23 Yamaha DM1000 Control DAW RTZ Modifier Assignment Moves the playhead to the left locator position DAW END DAW ONLINE Moves the playhead to the right locator position Activates or deactivates internal external synchronization DAW QUICK PUNCH DAW AUTO FADER Enables disables Autopunch mode Enables disables volume automation playback and recording DAW AUTO PAN Enables disables pan automation playback and recording DAW AUTO PLUGIN Enables disables plug in parameter automation playback and recording DAW AUTO MUTE Enables disables mute automation playback and recording DAW AUTO SEND Enables disables send level automation playback and recording DAW AUTO WRITE Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Write automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Write DAW OPTION ALL Sets all channel strips to Write automation mode DAW AUTO TOUCH Sets selected chann
218. levels of channels that precede the Master fader in the signal path Move the fader left to decrease the master level or to the right to increase the master level Chapter 4 M Audio iControl 122 M Audio iControl Assignment Overview The following assignment tables show all assignments for each control both with and without the Option button for the Assignment buttons and channel strip controls and the Cycle button for the Jog Wheel and transport buttons being pressed e M Audio iControl Assignment Buttons Functions e M Audio iControl Channel Strip Controls and Functions e M Audio iControl Jog Wheel Controls and Functions e M Audio iControl Transport Controls and Functions M Audio iControl Assignment Buttons Functions The Assignment buttons in the All Tracks and Selected Track areas define the behavior of the channel strip controls iControl button Modifier Function Comments Volume Encoders control channel s Level fader Pan Encoders control channel s Pan Balance control Generator Encoders control software instrument parameters Track Info Encoders control channel strip parameters EQ Encoders control EQ parameters Effect 1 Encoders control Insert 3 parameters Effect 2 Encoders control Insert 4 parameter Option Modifier for other controls while held down the modified control either applies the function to all channel strips or sets the parameter to its minimum
219. ling parameters 1 to 8 Pressing the Arrow Up button shifts to parameters 9 to 16 Pressing the Arrow Up button again shifts to parameters 12 to 19 Pressing the Arrow Down button shifts back to parameters 9 to 16 not 4 to 11 This way you always revert to the page positions you expect to find and are comfortable with Chapter 4 M Audio iControl 117 118 EQ Button Pressing the EQ button allows you to edit the EQ parameters of the selected channel strip If a Channel or Linear Phase EQ exists on the selected channel strip pressing the EQ button opens the EQ plug in window If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ exists on the selected channel strip a Channel EQ is inserted automatically The Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons switch to the next or previous parameter page Each Assignment button has two modes Mixer view and Channel view that determine whether the rotary encoders and in some cases the Select buttons edit separate channels or the same channel For more information see M Audio iControl Mixer View and Channel Vi M Audio iControl Arrow Up and Arrow Down Buttons The iControl has channel strip controls for eight channel strips which default to channel strips 1 to 8 To access further channel strips press the Arrow Up button This allows you to control channel strips 9 through 16 Press the Arrow Up button again to control channel strips 17 to 24 or press the Arrow Down button to control channel strips 1 to 8
220. lip mode Yamaha 01V96 Stereo Channel Strip Section The following table outlines the stereo channel strip control assignment Control Assignment SEL Switches SEL buttons 1 to 16 between channel strip and automation mode selection Pressing the SEL button repeatedly when in automation mode rotates all available automation modes Yamaha 01V96 User Defined Keys Section These keys can be assigned to the following functions Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the control name Control Modifier Assignment DAW WIN STATUS Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab in the Media area Chapter 21 Yamaha 01V96 255 Control Modifier DAW REC RDY 1 to 16 Assignment Enables disables the Record Enable button of the specified channel strip DAW WIN TRANSPORT Opens or closes the Transport bar window DAW BANK Shifts channel strips by one bank to the left DAW BANK DAW SHIFT ADD Shifts channel strips by one bank to the right Enables a second function use for some buttons DAW OPTION ALL While held down Value Change mode is set to Full Turning the encoder to the right sets the maximum value Turning it to the left sets the minimum value The encoder also stops at its de
221. lot 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Edit mode Sets value Channel Display Mode Press the F3 button to select Channel Display mode Chapter 21 Yamaha 01V96 253 254 Control Assignment Moving virtual encoders 1to4 Adjusts parameter selected in the ENCODER MODE and AUX SELECT Use cursor keys and then rotate sections parameter wheel Selecting virtual encoders 1to4 When Send 1 to 8 is selected edits send pre post fader position Use cursor keys and then press enables or disables send mute or sets send level to default value ENTER button Send Input or Output Assignment mode confirms selection Meter Display Mode Press the F4 button to select Meter Display mode Control Assignment Level Meters Display momentary and peak level Yamaha 01V96 SELECTED CHANNEL Section The following table outlines the SELECTED CHANNEL controls and their assignments Control Assignment Pan control Adjusts the pan of the currently selected channel strip Yamaha 01V96 Data Entry Section The following table outlines the data entry controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the control name Control Modifier Assignment Parameter wheel Default adjusts the value of t
222. ment SHUTTLE Enables disables Shuttle mode Parameter wheel Default adjusts the value of the currently selected parameter DAW SHUTTLE Switches the parameter wheel to Shuttle mode DAW SCRUB Switches the parameter wheel to Scrub mode DEC button Default exits folder In Go to Marker dialog cancels dialog USER 13 Opens or closes the Audio Bin tab in the Media area INC button Switches between Cursor and Zoom mode Cursor Up Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Up Arrow key Zoom mode zooms out vertically USER 4 Zoom mode individual track zoom in USER 13 Page Up USER 5 USER 13 Scroll to top Cursor Down Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Down Arrow key Zoom mode zooms out vertically USER 4 Zoom mode individual track zoom out USER 13 Page Down USER 5 USER 13 Scroll to bottom Cursor Left Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Left Arrow key Zoom mode zooms out horizontally USER 4 Zoom mode individual track zoom reset for tracks of the same type USER 13 Page Left USER 5 USER 13 Scroll to left border Cursor Right Cursor mode equivalent to computer keyboard Right Arrow key Zoom mode zooms in horizontally USER 4 USER 13 Zoom mode individual track zoom reset of all tracks Page Right USER 5 USER 13 Scroll to right border of window with key focus ENTER Enters the selecte
223. meter being edited is briefly displayed on the right side of the main LCD The mode display shows tr for track and the upper row of the LCD shows track names Press NAME VALUE to display parameter values on the lower row of the LCD These are shown when you turn a V Pot or press its button You can manipulate the following controls for editing in Mixer view Turning the V Pots changes the associated channel strip parameter Pressing the button on a V Pot sets the parameter to its default value e The Cursor Left Cursor Right buttons switch to the next or previous channel strip parameter The selected parameter is displayed briefly in the upper row of the LCD Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons Channel View Channel view allows you to edit the most important channel strip parameters for a single channel strip volume pan instrument Insert slot 1 assignment Insert slot 2 assignment Send 1 level Send 2 level and Send 3 level When you switch to Channel view the mode display shows tr and the upper row of the LCD shows the name of the channel strip Press NAME VALUE to show parameter names in the upper row and parameter values in the lower row The following table lists what each V Pot edits in Channel view mode Control Action V Pot 1 Edits volume The current value is shown in the lower row of the LCD V Pot 2 Edits pan The current value appears in the lower row
224. meters When selected applicable values are appended with the appropriate unit Turn off this option if viewing units makes the display too cluttered Controller Assignments button Click to open the Controller Assignments window Setup button Click to open the Control Surfaces Setup window Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 30 Help Tags Preferences For control surfaces that feature freely programmable displays with more than six characters per line or segment of the display you can change the way help tags are shown Control surface help tags are similar to Logic Pro help tags showing additional information during use While editing show long names For Parameter name mM Parameter value Display Duration p 20 s Show info for multiple parameters m Show info when selecting tracks M Show info when editing volume Show value units For M instrument plug in parameters M Volume and other parameters e While editing show long names for checkboxes The two checkboxes in this section allow you to set how the names and values of parameters are displayed on the LCD of the control surface Parameter name checkbox When selected the upper LCD line displays the full parameter name rather than an abbreviated form of it when you edit a parameter Parameter value checkbox When selected the lower LCD line displays the full parameter value when you edit a parameter If the
225. mmands in Layers 1 2 and 3 W2 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key commands in Layers 1 2 and 3 W3 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key commands in Layers 1 2 and 3 W4 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key commands in Layers 1 2 and 3 W5 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key commands in Layers 1 2 and 3 W6 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key commands in Layers 1 2 and 3 W7 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key commands in Layers 1 2 and 3 JLCooper MCS3 Cursor Controls The following table outlines the cursor controls and their assignments Control Assignment Up Arrow Mirrors the behavior of the computer keyboard Up Arrow key Chapter 10 JLCooper MCS3 Down Arrow Mirrors the behavior of the computer keyboard Down Arrow key Left Arrow Mirrors the behavior of the computer keyboard Left Arrow key Right Arrow Mirrors the behavior of the computer keyboard Right Arrow key JLCooper MCS3 Jog Wheel and Shuttle Ring The following table outlines the Jog Wheel and Shuttle Ring controls and their assignments Control Assignment Jog Wheel Scrubs audio and MIDI SHUTTLE RING Shuttles the playhead backward when turned to the left Shuttles the playhead forward when turned to the right JLCooper MCS3 Transport Controls The following table outlines the transport controls and their assignments REW Moves the playhead backward by one bar F FWD
226. n e CMD ALT While held down parameters are edited in Fine high resolution mode when a V Pot is turned Mackie C4 Parameter Track and Slot Buttons The buttons at the lower right of the C4 are used to access channel strips channel strip elements and parameters BANK Left and BANK Right Buttons Shifts the parameter display by one page a group of parameters in particular views Chapter 14 Mackie C4 203 204 SINGLE Left and SINGLE Right Buttons Shifts the parameter display by one parameter in particular views TRACK L and TRACK R Buttons In Mixer view TRACK L and TRACK R shifts the fader bank left or right by the number of channel strips in the control surface group For example if you have two C4 units ina control surface group the view shifts by 16 channels Simultaneously pressing TRACK L or TRACK R and OPTION moves to the first or last group of channels in the project or parameter pages if in an edit mode For example if you are viewing the first 8 channels of 64 in the fader bank pressing OPTION and TRACK L or TRACK R will show the last 8 channels in the fader bank channels 57 to 64 In Channel view TRACK L and TRACK R select the previous or next channel In Channel view simultaneously pressing TRACK L or TRACK R and SHIFT moves to the first or last group of channels in the project or parameter pages if in an edit mode but only affects the Split Lower group if Split mode is active SLOT UP and SLOT DO
227. n Level Channel view You can control all Send slots for the selected channel strip in this mode Each channel strip corresponds to the embossed send number shown below the LCD The mode display shows dL Turning a V Pot preselects the corresponding send destination Pressing a V Pot confirms a preselected send destination The Solo buttons edit send position a lit Solo LED indicates Pre Fader mode The MUTE buttons set the send mute status The faders edit the send gain If one or more sends are activated on multiple channels you can switch between them while in the Channel View modes by simply pressing the SELECT button of the desired channel Chapter 3 Mackie Control 79 80 Mackie Control PLUG IN Button Pressing the PLUG IN button activates Plug in Mixer view Pressing the button repeatedly switches between Plug in Mixer view and Plug in Channel view Note There is one exception to this behavior If you are in Instrument Bale view Bids this button switches to Plug in Edit view For more information see Instrument Edit View Plug in Mixer View In this mode you can view and edit the plug ins associated with a particular Insert slot for all channels The mode display shows P1 to P9 or 10 to 16 indicating the selected Insert slot number Note If a software instrument channel is selected the display shows P1 to P9 and 10 to 15 The upper row of the LCD shows channel strip names The low
228. n assignments Link button When active the assignment that matches the most recently received MIDI message is automatically selected e Parameter field Displays the name of the selected parameter Channel Strip pop up menu Choose whether the assignment applies to the selected track or matches the channel strip number entered in the field beside the pop up menu as shown in the Mixer s All view Input message field Displays the incoming MIDI message data of the controller being assigned to a function Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments Assigning and Deleting Controllers in Easy View Only one set of assignment parameters is visible at a time in Easy view You use the Learn process to assign controllers to channel strip and plug in parameters The Learn process basically involves moving a controller on your control surface This sends a MIDI message to Logic Pro thus teaching Logic Pro which controller you are assigning to the chosen parameter To assign a controller in Easy view In the Mixer or in any plug in window select the parameter that you want Logic Pro to learn as a controller assignment Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Learn Assignment for parameter name Alternately you can use the Learn new Controller Assignment key command default Command L to open the Controller Assignments window and activate Learn mode The Controller Assignments window opens in
229. n the C4 displays Press V Select 19 labeled EQ Mixer Mackie C4 EQ Channel View Mode In EQ Channel view e Row 1 edits the frequency of all eight bands e Row 2 edits the gain slope of all eight bands Row 3 edits the Q factor of all eight bands e Row 4 sets the bypass state of all eight bands If no Channel or Linear Phase EQ is present on the selected channel a Channel EQ is automatically inserted when you enter the EQ Channel view The TRACK Left and TRACK Right buttons switch to the previous or next channel If you switch to a channel with no oon Channel or Linear Phase EQ inserted the C4 displays show and the corresponding V Pots do nothing To access EQ Channel view Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays Chapter 14 Mackie C4 Press V Select 27 labeled EQs Mackie C4 Send Mixer View Mode In Send Mixer view e Row 1 edits the send destination of the selected Send slot on the selected channel Row 2 edits the send level Row 3 edits the send position pre post fader Row 4 mutes unmutes the send The SLOT UP SLOT DOWN buttons select the Send slot The TRACK L and TRACK R buttons shift the fader bank to the left or right by the number of channel strips in the control surface group To access Send Mixer view Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays Press V Select 20 lab
230. ncoders to EQ frequency editing s mute Enables disables bypass of currently edited send and switches rotary encoders to send level editing SHIFT eff 2 Enables disables bypass of currently selected EQ band and switches rotary encoders to EQ Gain editing pre post Switches between Pre and Post Fader modes of currently edited send and switches rotary encoders to send level editing Post mode is indicated by a lit LED SHIFT eff 3 Enables disables bypass of currently selected EQ band and switches rotary encoders to EQ Q factor editing select Switches rotary encoders to Pan Surround editing The parameter is chosen with the rotary selector SHIFT eff 4 Switches rotary encoders to channel parameter editing Note In modal dialogs the Multi buttons generate the computer keyboard character shown on the button face CM Labs Motormix Burn Buttons These buttons labelled I to P have multiple uses depending on the current mode as indicated by the red LEDs to the left Chapter 6 CM Labs Motormix 143 144 Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Mode Modifier record Assignment Enables disables Record Enable status of channel SHIFT fnctA Switches automation mode to Latch ALL SHIFT fnctA Switches automation mode of all channels to Latch
231. nd mode Switches the bypass state of EQ bands 1 4 The button LED is lit when the EQ is enabled In Plug in mode Switches between Inserts 1 4 A lit button LED indicates the selected Insert slot Ifa plug in window is open it will update to reflect the plug in parameters of the selected Insert slot SHIFT In EQ Send mode Enables disables Send 1 4 Mute EQ SEND Switches Channel view modes between EQ Send Edit mode LED on Pan Edit mode LED off 216 Chapter 17 Roland Sl 24 Control PLUG IN Modifier Assignment Switches Channel view modes between Plug in Edit mode LED on Plug in window opens Pan Edit mode LED off Plug in window closes when Plug in Edit mode is exited SHIFT Switches Channel view modes between Instrument Edit mode LED on Instrument window opens Pan Edit mode LED off Instrument plug in window closes when Instrument Edit mode is exited PAN 1 to 12 In Pan Edit mode Controls channel strip Pan Balance surround angle for channels in surround mode In EQ Send mode 1 3 5 7 Control the Gain parameter of EQ bands 1 4 2 4 6 8 Control the Frequency parameter of EQ bands 1 4 9 12 Control Send 1 4 levels In Plug in Edit mode 1 10 Edits plug in parameter 11 Bypasses the plug in 12 Shifts plug in parameter page A page is a collection of parameters In Instrument mode 1 10 Edits Ins
232. ne of the function keys activates one of the following common commands F1 Cut F2 Copy F3 Paste F4 Clear F5 Select All F6 Select All Following F7 Select Similar Regions Events F8 Select Inside Locators In modal dialogs pressing one of the function keys is equivalent to using the computer keyboard number keys Function key Action F1 1 F2 2 Chapter 3 Mackie Control 87 88 Function key Action F3 3 F4 4 F5 5 F6 6 F7 7 F8 8 The buttons located directly below the function keys complete the numeric input functions MIDI Tracks button 9 Inputs button 0 In some other modes the function keys perform other actions such as shortcuts to markers For more information see Mackie Control Marker Button Also see the tables in Mackie Control Assignment Overview Mackie Control Global View Zone You can use the eight buttons in the Global View zone to display and edit specific types of channel strips Pressing any of the buttons in the Global View zone activates All View mode when this mode is active the green LED to the right of the GLOBAL VIEW button is illuminated When you press one of the buttons in the Global View zone the corresponding type of channel strip appears in the main LCD You can edit each channel strip with the corresponding channel strip controls Pressing multiple buttons Audio Tracks Instruments and Aux for example displays all channels of th
233. nel strip AUTO button to set automation mode to Touch OPTION ALL Sets all channels to Touch automation mode WRITE Sets selected channel to Write automation mode While held down press the channel strip AUTO button to set automation mode to Write OPTION ALL Sets all channels to Write automation mode OFF Sets selected channel to Off automation mode While held down press the channel strip AUTO button to set automation mode to Off OPTION ALL Sets all channels to Off automation mode Mackie HUI STATUS GROUP Section The following table outlines the status group controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Chapter 13 Mackie HUI 185 186 Control Modifier Assignment AUTO While held down the scribble strips display the automation mode of all channels MONITOR PHASE SHIFT Switches to Single view GROUP Enters Group Edit mode The upper line in the DSP Edit section displays the number and name of the group being edited DSP Select buttons 1 to 4 switch between the properties of the group being edited The group name is shown in the lower line When the INSERT PARAM button is off the DSP Edit V Pots scroll through the group properties If the INSERT PARAM button is on the DSP EDIT V Pots select the group that you want to edit The SELECT but
234. ng the Cursor Right button again shifts to parameters 12 to 19 Pressing the Cursor Left button shifts back to parameters 9 to 16 not 4 to 11 This way you always revert to the page positions you expect to find and are comfortable with e To switch by a single parameter rather than by page hold down the CMD ALT key while pressing the Cursor Left or Cursor Right button The Cursor Up Cursor Down buttons change the currently displayed Insert slot 1 to 15 If you have a control surface group consisting of several Mackie Control and XT units the parameters are distributed across their displays The number of parameters shown depends on the Multiple Controls per Parameter settings in the Peale Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Preferences See Setting Control Surfaces Pr Ss for details Note When you exit Plug in Edit view the plug in window closes Compatibility Mackie Control can edit all plug ins that can be automated The plug in type Logic Pro native TDM Audio Units is irrelevant Some third party manufacturer plug ins unfortunately don t provide parameter names or values as text In such cases parameters are named and enumerated as Control 1 Control 2 and so on with values displayed as numbers ranging between 0 and 1000 Contact the plug in manufacturer to obtain a version that supports this feature Mackie Control INSTRUMENT Button Pressing the INSTRUMENT button activates Instrum
235. nment ASSIGN COMPARE Switches DSP display between track Chapter 13 Mackie HU name parameter name and parameter name parameter value modes Control Modifier BYPASS Assignment Switches the bypass state of the plug in being edited DSP Select 1 to 4 Assignment Pan mode DSP Select 1 resets pan or surround angle DSP Select 2 resets surround diversity DSP Select 3 resets surround LFE level DSP Select 4 resets the Spread parameter Assignment Send mode Activates or deactivates Sends 1 to 4 or mutes 5 to 8 Effect Assign mode Confirms Insert 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 effect selection selects this Insert slot and enters Effect Edit mode showing the parameters of the chosen effect Effect Edit mode Sets parameter to the default value or turns switching parameters on off DSP V Pots Assignment Pan mode DSP V Pot 1 controls pan or surround angle DSP V Pot 2 controls surround diversity DSP V Pot 3 controls surround LFE level DSP V Pot 4 controls the Spread parameter Assignment Send mode Controls Send 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Levels Effect Assign mode Assigns effects to Insert slots 1 through 4 or 5 to 8 Effect Edit mode Controls the selected effect parameter INSERT PARAM SCROLL Switches between Effect Assign and Effect Edit modes Effect Edit mode Shifts parameter display by the number of DSP V Pots in the control surface group usually four
236. nnel View mode Chapter 3 Mackie Control V Pot 1 or F1 Switches to EQ Mixer view and selects frequency V Pot 2 or F2 Switches to EQ Mixer view and selects gain V Pot 3 or F3 Switches to EQ Mixer view and selects Q V Pot 4 or F4 Switches to EQ Mixer view and selects bypass V Pot 6 or F6 Switches to EQ Channel view V Pot 7 or F7 Switches to Frequency Gain Mixer view In this mode you can edit the frequency and gain parameters of a specific EQ band 1 to 8 for all channel strips The mode display shows F1 to F8 indicating the selected EQ band The upper LCD row shows channel strip names The lower LCD row shows the frequency of the selected EQ band Turning a V Pot changes EQ frequency Pressing a V Pot sets the EQ frequency to its default value Use the Mute buttons to bypass the EQ Use the faders to adjust the EQ gain V Pot 8 or F8 Switches to Frequency Gain Channel view In this mode you can edit the frequency and gain parameters for all EQ bands of the selected channel strip Each pair of channel strips corresponds to one EQ band The mode display shows FG V Pots 1 to 8 control the frequency of EQ bands 1 to 8 Mute buttons 1 to 8 control the bypass of EQ bands 1 to 8 Faders 1 to 8 control the gain of EQ bands 1 to 8 Note The faders form a frequency response curve in this mode if the EQ bands have ascending frequency values Tip You can edit another channel stri
237. nobsets are organized hierarchically The top level knobset leads to the following knobsets Inserts Pressing the Inserts knob top displays all effect plug ins inserted in the currently selected channel strip see Euphonix Using the Inserts Configuration Knobset If a plug in is enabled and does not belong to the dynamic EQ or filter plug in groups either the On key is lit MC Pro and MC Mix or the knob s image shows a small green LED on the lower left MC Control To switch the bypass state press the respective On key or knob image or the Ins In key on the CM408T channel strip Input Pressing the Input knob top displays all possible channel input values for the selected channel strip see Euphonix Using the Input Configuration Knobset Dyn The Dyn knob top is not currently used to display a list or allow editing of dynamic plug ins If a dynamic plug in is enabled either the On key is lit MC Pro and MC Mix or the knob s image shows a small green LED on the lower left MC Control To switch the bypass state press the respective On key or knob image or the Dyn In key on the CM408T channel strip EQ Pressing the EQ knob top switches to EQ editing mode See Euphonix Using the EQ Knobset If an EQ plug in is enabled either the On key is lit MC Pro and MC Mix or the knob s image shows a small green LED on the lower left MC Control To switch the bypass state press the respective On key or knob imag
238. nput format you want Editing Instrument Plug ins You edit instrument plug ins in Input mode using the Input knobset To edit an instrument plug in Press the Input knob top or key to display the software instrument plug in inserted in the currently selected channel strip The instrument plug in name is displayed on the Soft Keys the touchscreen or the display depending on the system you are using Press the knob top to display the instrument plug in parameters in the order shown in the Controls view of the instrument Turn the respective knob to change the value Depending on the system you are using for parameters with only two values you can either press the On key or turn the respective knob to switch between the two values The On key is lit when the value is 1 or on and unlit when the value is 0 or off Pressing a knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value If the instrument plug in features more than eight parameters use the Page keys to navigate between pages of parameters Press the Back key to return to the top level knobset Changing or Inserting Instrument Plug ins You change or insert instrument plug ins in Input Configuration mode using the Input Configuration knobset To change or insert an instrument Press the Input knob top or key Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport 133 _ Press both Page keys simultaneously to switch to Input Conf
239. ns These functions allow you to move the selected region or events by various amounts or to a specific position The position of the first selected region or event is displayed above V Pots 3 and 4 If nothing is displayed either a window that does not allow the selection of regions or events is open or no regions or events are selected Chapter 3 Mackie Control 95 96 The functions are as follows Control Label Action V Pot 1 Nudge Selects the nudge value used by the REWIND and FAST FWD buttons These buttons move the selected objects backward forward by the defined value V Pot 2 Pickup Moves to the current playhead position V Pot 3 Bar Moves by one bar V Pot 4 Beat Moves by the current project denominator value beats V Pot 5 Division Moves by the current project division value V Pot 6 Ticks Moves by single ticks V Pot 7 Frames Moves by one SMPTE frame V Pot 8 Fram 2 Moves by half a SMPTE frame The cursor buttons emulate the computer keyboard s arrow keys allowing easy selection of a region or event Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons Pressing the NUDGE button a second time turns off Large Nudge mode Temporary Nudge Mode To use Nudge temporarily for one or two small moves hold down the NUDGE button and use one or more of the V Pots This action executes the selected function and then exits Temporary Nudge mode as soon as you relea
240. nzPort Channel Strip The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note A SHIFT or other modifier shown below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate meaning while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment lt CHAN Shifts the currently displayed channel to the left by one channel SHIFT Shifts the currently displayed channel left by eight channels CHAN gt Shifts the currently displayed channel right by one channel SHIFT Shifts the currently displayed channel right by eight channels REC Activates deactivates the Record Enable button of the currently displayed channel SHIFT Disables the Record Enable buttons of all channels SOLO Enables disables Solo for the currently displayed channel SHIFT Disables Solo for all channels MUTE Enables disables Mute for the currently displayed channel SHIFT Disables Mute for all channels ANY SOLO Lit if any tracks channels or regions are soloed UNDO Undo SHIFT Redo Frontier Design TranzPort Master Section The following table outlines the master controls and their assignments Note A SHIFT or other modifier shown below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate meaning while the modifier is held down Chapter 7 Frontier Design TranzPort Control Modifier SHIFT Assignment Modifier that alters the function of other controls
241. o Know Knobsets Euphonix Other Features Specific to Logic Pro CM Labs Motormix Setting Up Your CM Labs Motormix CM Labs Motormix Assignment Overview Frontier Design TranzPort Setting Up Your Frontier Design TranzPort Frontier Design TranzPort LCD Frontier Design TranzPort Assignment Overview JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Setting Up Your JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Assignment Overview Contents Chapter 9 Chapter 10 Chapter 11 Chapter 12 Chapter 13 Chapter 14 Chapter 15 Chapter 16 Chapter 17 Chapter 18 161 161 162 163 163 163 167 167 167 173 173 173 177 177 178 191 191 191 192 199 199 203 203 205 205 205 211 213 213 213 215 215 216 223 223 JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 Setting Up Your JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 Assignment Overview JLCooper MCS3 Setting Up Your JLCooper MCS3 JLCooper MCS3 Assignment Overview Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Setting Up Your Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Assignment Overview Mackie Baby HUI Setting Up Your Mackie Baby HUI Mackie Baby HUI Assignment Overview Mackie HUI Setting Up Your Mackie HUI Mackie HUI Assignment Overview Mackie C4 Setting Up Your Mackie C4 Mackie C4 Using V Pots and V Select Buttons Mackie C4 View Modes Mackie C4 Function Buttons Mackie C4 Assignment Buttons Mackie C4 Modifier Buttons Mackie C4 Pa
242. oach is due to messages sent by the Korg devices when the pad is immediately released a value range is learned Holding the pad until Learn mode disengages results in a fixed value being learned Send Mode This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 10 In Send mode the channel strip encoders control the send level of the selected send The Pads remain in the currently selected mode Send Overlay Pressing SETTING while the encoders are in Send mode changes the operation of the Pads in Send mode Chapter 11 Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 169 170 Pad Assignment 1 8 Switches the send bypass state of the currently selected send for the eight channel strips 9 16 Switches the send position pre post fader of the currently selected send for the eight channel strips Effect Edit Mode This mode is enabled by pressing SCENE and Pad 13 In Effect Edit mode the channel strip encoders control the parameters of the currently selected effect The Pads remain in the currently selected mode Effect Edit Overlay Pressing SETTING while the encoders are in Effect Edit mode changes the operation of the Pads in Effect Edit mode Pad Assignment 1 8 Switches the effect bypass state of the currently selected Insert slot for the eight channel strips Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Main Section The main LCD shows information on the current mode of the encoders lt Instrument name gt Encoders
243. obal Buttons The following table outlines the global controls and their assignments Control Assignment Select Switches Track buttons to track selection duties Aux Switches Track buttons to emulate Record Enable buttons Solo Switches Track buttons to emulate Solo buttons Mute Switches Track Buttons to emulate Mute buttons Inc Increases fader bank display to show next four channels Dec Decreases fader bank display to show previous four channels JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 Channel Strip The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Control Assignment Track button Performs currently selected function Select Record Enable Solo Mute Fader Controls volume touch sensitive and motorized Chapter 9 JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 U A A WwW N JLCooper MCS3 10 This chapter describes how to use your JLCooper MCS3 MIDI or USB control surface with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your JLCooper MCS3 p 163 JLCooper MCS3 Assignment Overview p 163 Setting Up Your JLCooper MCS3 Logic Pro supports USB or MIDI versions of the JLCooper MCS3 control surface Both USB and MIDI versions are installed automatically when you open Logic Pro If your MCS3 is not recognized and installed correctly follow the steps below To add JLCooper MCS3 control surfaces connected via USB Ensure that your MCS3 USB device is correctly connected to the computer
244. of channel strips Many also offer a Jog Wheel which allows you to move the playhead precisely transport buttons such as Play Rewind and so on and other controls Some simple control surfaces only provide non motorized faders and knobs More sophisticated units include motorized faders rotary encoders LED rings and programmable displays The additional feedback these control surfaces provide makes them easier to use without having to refer to your computer screen to know what mode the device is in or what current parameter values are Note When you use a supported control surface with Logic Pro some controls are premapped to common functions You can map unassigned controls to other Logic Pro commands and functions see Assigning Controllers to Logic Pro Parameters About the Logic Pro Documentation Logic Studio comes with various documents that will help you get started as well as provide detailed information about the included applications Logic Pro User Manual The onscreen user manual is a comprehensive document that describes the Logic Pro interface commands and menus and gives step by step instructions for creating Logic Pro projects and for accomplishing specific tasks It is written for users of all levels of experience The user manual is available in Logic Pro Help in Logic Pro choose Help gt Logic Pro Exploring Logic Pro This booklet presents the basics of Logic Pro in an easy approachable way Each
245. ogic Pro performs the operation for each model in turn Note If you don t want to select the models to be scanned you can simply choose New gt Scan All in the Setup window Logic Pro searches for all supported control surface units on all MIDI ports This process may take a while Click the Scan button You can also press Enter or double click the device name to initiate the scan Logic Pro scans your system for connected devices and automatically installs and connects to those it finds When you finish close the window Some control surfaces don t support automatic scanning Such devices must be added manually to your setup When you add a device manually you also need to assign the appropriate MIDI In and Out port parameters Note It is preferable to install devices by scanning whenever possible Logic Pro is able to gather more information about devices through scanning than via manual installation To add a control surface manually Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup to open the Control Surfaces Setup window In the Setup window choose New gt Install and select the device you want from the list Click the Add button Close the Install window when you finish If another control surface of the selected type already exists in your setup a warning dialog asks you to confirm the addition of the new device You need to manually alter the MIDI In and Out port values in the Device Param
246. ol This in conjunction with navigation between markers using the REWIND and FAST FWD buttons moves the playhead and automatically sets a cycle area between adjacent markers Try this and other options with various button combinations Mackie Control STOP Button Pressing the STOP button stops project playback or recording if active and stops all other Transport functions Pressing the STOP button a second time returns the playhead to the project start point or the beginning of the nearest cycle area if Cycle mode is active Pressing STOP repeatedly switches between these two functions Mackie Control PLAY Button Pressing PLAY starts playback from the current playhead position Pressing PLAY repeatedly jumps to the beginning of the nearest cycle area if Cycle mode is active Pressing SHIFT and PLAY simultaneously works as a Pause command Mackie Control RECORD Button Pressing RECORD activates recording on the selected MIDI audio or software instrument channel strip if it is armed for recording It is possible that the first time you arm an audio channel strip by pressing the REC RDY button for the channel a Save dialog will appear on your computer screen Enter a filename and a save location in the dialog then press Save The Mackie Control LCD display shows There is a file select dialog on the screen The Position Time display shows ALERT All LEDs are unlit Once you enter the filename and press Save
247. ols Send 4 level Chapter 19 Tascam US 2400 235 236 Control Assignment Encoder 5 AUX 5 Controls Send 5 level Encoder 6 AUX 6 Controls Send 6 level Encoder 7 Controls Send 7 level Encoder 8 Controls Send 8 level Encoder 11 GAIN 1 Controls the Gain parameter of band 3 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 12 FREQ 1 Controls the Frequency parameter of band 3 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 13 Q 1 Controls the Q factor of band 3 if a Channel or Linear Phase is inserted Encoder 14 GAIN 2 Controls the Gain parameter of band 4 if a Channel or Linear Phase is inserted Encoder 15 FREQ 2 Controls the Frequency parameter of band 4 if a Channel or Linear Phase is inserted Encoder 16 Q 2 Controls the Q factor of band 4 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 17 GAIN 3 Controls the Gain parameter of band 5 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 18 FREQ 3 Controls the Frequency parameter of band 5 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 19 Q 3 Controls the Q factor of band 5 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 20 GAIN 4 Controls the Gain parameter of band 6 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 21 FREQ 4 Controls the Frequency parameter of band 6 if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted Encoder 22 Q 4 Controls the Q factor of band 6 if a C
248. ols and their functions Chapter 3 Mackie Control 109 Button Modifier Function Comments MARKER Switch Small Marker mode on off SHIFT Switch Large Marker mode on off NUDGE Switch Small Nudge mode on off SHIFT Switch Large Nudge mode on off MARKER Create a marker This allows you to create a marker with one hand without entering Large Marker mode CYCLE Activate deactivate Cycle mode SHIFT Switch to Cycle view DROP Activate deactivate Autopunch mode SHIFT Switch to Punch view REPLACE Activate deactivate Replace mode CLICK Activate deactivate metronome click separately for playback and record SHIFT Activate deactivate internal external sync and MMC SOLO Activate deactivate Solo Lock function SHIFT Enable Solo Lock function REWIND lt lt Shuttle rewind MARKER Go to previous marker NUDGE Nudge left by chosen value CYCLE Engage Cycle mode and set left locator to playhead DROP Engage Autopunch mode and set punch in locator In Marker mode Go to previous marker In Nudge mode Nudge left by chosen value FFWD gt gt Shuttle forward MARKER Go to next marker NUDGE Nudge right by chosen value CYCLE Engage Cycle mode and set right locator to playhead DROP Engage Autopunch and set punch out to locator In Marker mode Go to previous marker 110 Chapter 3 Mackie C
249. on Turning V Pot 1 Shows and edits the current cycle status off or on you can also use the CYCLE button Turning V Pot 2 BySel sets the current cycle area by the selection made in the Arrange window selected audio or MIDI region Turning V Pot 3 Move moves the current cycle by a bar with each click of the V Pot Pressing V Pot 5 Picks up the current playhead position for the left locator Turning V Pot 5 Changes the left locator in bars Turning V Pot 6 Changes the left locator in beats denominator steps Pressing V Pot 7 Picks up the current playhead position for the right locator Turning V Pot 7 Changes the right locator in bars Turning V Pot 8 Changes the right locator in beats denominator steps Mackie Control DROP Button The DROP button lets you activate and deactivate Autopunch mode Chapter 3 Mackie Control 97 98 BW N To navigate between punch in areas Press the MARKER button Press the DROP button and when active as indicated by the lit LED press the FAST FWD or REWIND button To set the punch in or punch out locator to the current playhead position Hold down the DROP button and press FAST FWD or REWIND This also activates Autopunch mode To quickly define a new punch in area Navigate to the desired punch in locator position with the Jog Scrub Wheel Press the DROP and REWIND buttons Navigate to the desired punch out locator position with the Jog Scrub Wheel Pres
250. on Enable setup display shows AE MUTE 1 Enables disables volume automation MUTE 2 Enables disables pan automation MUTE 3 Enables disables mute automation MUTE 4 Enables disables automation of solo MUTE 5 Enables disables send level automation MUTE 6 Enables disables automation of plug in parameters F2 Switches automation mode between Read and Off display shows Td F3 Switches automation mode between Touch and Off display shows Tc 156 Chapter 8 JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Control Modifier Assignment F4 Switches automation mode between Latch and Off display shows Lt F5 Switches automation mode between Write and Off display shows Wr ARM Activates deactivates Record Enable button Faders Control volume As the faders don t offer feedback Pickup mode is used as per the pots See the pickup information in JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Pots JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Bank Button The following table outlines the bank controls and their assignments Control Assignment Small red button with green LED LED off Black labels of channel strip buttons apply TRK LOC ARM LED on White labels of channel strip buttons apply PAN SOLO MUTE JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk F Key Section The following table outlines the F key controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a description it indicates that the control has an alte
251. on Key Zone Mackie Control Global View Zone Mackie Control Modifier Buttons Chapter 4 Chapter 5 Chapter 6 Chapter 7 Chapter 8 89 91 92 99 100 100 101 101 115 115 116 116 118 118 120 120 120 121 121 122 125 125 126 127 128 129 129 130 138 139 139 139 149 149 149 150 153 153 153 Mackie Control Automation Buttons Mackie Control Utilities Buttons Mackie Control Transport Zone Mackie Control Cursor Key Zone Mackie Control Jog Scrub Wheel Zone Mackie Control Programmable User Modes Mackie Control Connecting Foot Switches Mackie Control Assignment Overview M Audio iControl Setting Up Your M Audio iControl Editing Plug in Parameters Using the M Audio iControl M Audio iControl Assignment Buttons M Audio iControl Arrow Up and Arrow Down Buttons M Audio iControl Channel Strip Controls M Audio iControl Mixer View and Channel View M Audio iControl Jog Wheel M Audio iControl Transport Controls M Audio iControl Using Locators and Cycle Mode M Audio iControl Master Fader M Audio iControl Assignment Overview Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport Setting Up Your Euphonix Device with Logic Pro Euphonix Changing the Track Display Euphonix MC Professional Setting Up Soft Key Assignments Euphonix Choosing Automation Modes Euphonix Understanding the Fader Strips Euphonix Opening and Closing Plug in Windows Euphonix Getting t
252. ontrol Button Modifier Function Comments In Nudge mode Nudge right by chosen value STOP Stop PLAY Play SHIFT Pause RECORD Record Mackie Control Cursor Keys The following table outlines the cursor controls and their functions Mackie Control Cursor Left Right Modifier If in Mixer view Function Comments Select previous next parameter of current view ZOOM Scroll window horizontally by page If in Channel Strip EQ Send view or Plug in Instrument Edit view Shift current editor page by one page CMD ALT ZOOM Shift current editor page by one parameter Scroll window horizontally by page Otherwise always in Nudge mode Mimic computer keyboard Left Right Arrow keys ZOOM Scroll window horizontally by page In Zoom mode Change horizontal zoom level SHIFT Reset individual track zoom of current track Cursor Left or all tracks of same type Cursor Right Cursor Up Down In Channel Strip EQ Send view or Plug In Instrument Editor view Chapter 3 Mackie Control 111 Mackie Control Modifier Function Comments Select previous next EQ band Send or Insert slot ZOOM Scroll window vertically by page Otherwise always in Nudge mode Mimic computer keyboard Up Down Arrow keys ZOOM Scroll window vertically by page In Zoom mode _ Change vertical zoom level
253. ontrol 91 92 CANCEL Button When an alert appears on your computer screen you can cancel kg abort it by pressing the CANCEL button For information about alerts see Modal Dialog D Pressing the CANCEL button when no alert is visible onscreen does the following Opens the Toolbox at the current onscreen position of the pointer Alternately it will perform any function currently assigned to the computer keyboard s Esc Escape key If the Mackie Control is currently showing the contents of a folder track pressing the CANCEL button exits the folder The CANCEL button also lets you invalidate a blinking parameter value preselection ENTER Button When an alert appears on your computer screen pressing the ENTER button artivates the default button in the alert For information about alerts see Modal Dialog Display If there is no alert onscreen and the selected track is a folder track pressing the ENTER button opens the folder Mackie Control Transport Zone The Transport zone features five buttons for the standard transport functions Rewind Fast Forward Stop Play and Record The Transport zone also incorporates seven small circular buttons for different recording and playback modes You can use these buttons independently or in conjunction with one another to navigate and edit your projects Each button has a dedicated LED that indicates its current status Mackie Control REWIND Button The REWIND bu
254. ort with Logic Pro Note Support for the AlphaTrack control surface is available from Frontier Design This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Frontier Design TranzPort p 149 Frontier Design TranzPort LCD p 149 Frontier Design TranzPort Assignment Overview p 150 Setting Up Your Frontier Design TranzPort Follow the steps below to use your Frontier Design TranzPort control surface with Logic Pro To set up your Frontier Design TranzPort device in Logic Pro Ensure that the software that shipped with the TranzPort is installed Make sure that the Tranz Bridge the wireless transmitter is connected to the computer via USB When Logic Pro is opened it installs the TranzPort automatically and sets it to Native mode Frontier Design TranzPort LCD The LCD displays the following information Top line left Name of currently displayed channel Top line middle Volume level of currently displayed channel Top line right Pan position of currently displayed channel Bottom line left Level meter of currently displayed channel Bottom line right Current playhead position 149 150 Frontier Design TranzPort Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Frontier Design TranzPort interface elements to Logic functions e Frontier Design TranzPort Channel Strip Frontier Design TranzPort Master Section e Frontier Design TranzPort External Input Frontier Design Tra
255. oses Transport bar window F8 ESC Default exits folder Go to Marker mode cancels dialog CMD ALT FINE Opens or closes the Audio Bin Mackie HUI AUTO ENABLE Section The following table outlines the global controls and their assignments Control Assignment FADER Activates or deactivates the recording of volume automation Chapter 13 Mackie HUI PAN Activates or deactivates the recording of pan automation PLUG IN Activates or deactivates the recording of plug in parameter automation MUTE Activates or deactivates the recording of mute automation SEND Activates or deactivates the recording of send level automation SEND MUTE Mackie HUI AUTO MODE Section The following table outlines the automation controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment READ Sets selected channel to Read automation mode While held down pressing the channel strip AUTO button sets the automation mode to Read OPTION ALL Sets all channels to Read automation mode LATCH Sets selected channel to Latch automation mode While held down press the channel strip AUTO button to set automation mode to Latch OPTION ALL Sets all channels to Latch automation mode TRIM TOUCH Sets selected channel to Touch automation mode While held down press the chan
256. ot that is currently being edited 8 Switches between Plug in Assignment and Plug in Edit modes Parameter Up amp Parameter Down Plug in Edit mode shifts the parameter display to show the next previous page of parameter controls usually four for the selected plug in USER 13 Plug in Edit mode shifts the parameter display up down by one parameter for the selected plug in Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 283 284 Control Selecting virtual encoders 1 to 4 Use cursor keys and then press ENTER button Assignment Pan Assignment mode Parameter control 1 button centers pan or surround angle Parameter control 2 button centers surround diversity Parameter control 3 button resets surround LFE level Parameter control 4 button resets spread Send Assignment mode Enables disables Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Assignment mode Confirms the plug in selection for Insert slots 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and enters Plug in Edit mode for the selected Insert slot Plug In Edit mode Sets value to default or switches buttons with two states Moving virtual encoders 1 to 4 Use cursor keys and then rotate parameter wheel Pan Assignment mode Parameter control 1 edits pan or surround angle Parameter control 2 edits surround diversity Parameter control 3 edits surround LFE level Parameter control 4 edits spread Send Assignment mode Controls the Send leve
257. ote In most situations the placement of your control surface units in relation to each other should be the same onscreen as in the real world Simply position the icons in your control surface group accordingly Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 17 Once you have created a control surface group you can configure it in the Setup window For more information see Control Surface Group Parameters Configuring Your Control Surface Setup The left side of the Setup window contains two or three parameter areas Device parameters Special parameters if your connected device supports them and Control Surface Group parameters You can configure your control surface setup to meet your needs by editing the parameters in these boxes Important Any changes to settings in the Setup window or from the device are saved in a preferences file named com apple logic pro cs located in Library Preferences This file is saved independently of the Logic Pro Preferences file Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Device Parameters The Device Parameters area contains the following items Edit New v View v V Logic Control Out Port All Input Any Module Logic Control Model Logic Control Version unknown Color Transport Button Click V Touchless movable faders Fader Touch Sensitivity 3 Backlight Saver Timeout min 15 Serial No ow e Out Port Choose the MIDI output port from the pop u
258. ough 13 Switching to the Instrument Channel view displays instruments 6 through 13 Chapter 3 Mackie Control 86 Mackie Control FLIP Button Press the FLIP button alone or in combination with a modifier key to activate or deactivate one of the following modes Flip Swap or Zero Flip Mode Pressing the FLIP button activates Flip mode In Flip mode the current assignments of the eight V Pots are mirrored by the eight channel faders so that both control the same parameter Turning one of the V Pots causes the corresponding fader to move and vice versa When you activate Flip mode the LED next to the FLIP button illuminates Pressing the FLIP button again turns off Flip mode Flip mode offers the following advantages You can edit any type of parameter with a fader which allows more precise editing control e Unlike the V Pots the faders are touch sensitive This allows you to overwrite existing controller automation movements with a constant value Swap Mode Holding down the SHIFT button while pressing the FLIP button activates Swap mode In Swap mode the encoder assignments are swapped with the fader assignments so that the faders control the parameter previously assigned to the V Pots and vice versa The LED next to the FLIP button flashes when Swap mode is active When Swap mode is active pressing FLIP again reverts to Flip mode Holding down the SHIFT button and pressing FLIP turns off Swap mode and returns the V
259. oup parameters in the Control Surface Group Parameters area These parameters apply to the group associated with the selected device and allow you to set up each group to meet your needs This is especially helpful when you have multiple control surface groups Many if not all control surface group parameters can also be changed directly from the control surface as well as from the Setup window If you have created multiple control surface groups the Control Surface Group Parameters area shows the settings for the group that is currently selected in the Setup window Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Control Surface Group Display Parameters The parameters at the top of the Control Surface Group Parameters area give you control over aspects of the device displays Control Surface Group 1 Flip Mode Off Display Mode Value Clock Display Beats Channel Strip View Mode Arrange Fader Bank for Tracks View 0 Fader Bank for All View 0 Channel Strip Parameter Volume Surround Parameter Angle EQ Band 1 EQ Parameter Frequency EQ Parameter Page 0 gt 4 o a Flip Mode Choose the functions for the faders and rotary encoders of the channel strips on the device For control surfaces that contain a fader and a rotary encoder for each channel strip Flip mode allows you to assign both controls to the same parameter or swap their assignments The choices are Off Standard mode with the fader acting
260. owing table outlines the encoder controls and their assignments Control Assignment FLIP Switches Flip mode between Off and Swap In Swap mode the parameter controlled by the fader and encoder of each channel strip is swapped PAN Assigns Pan to encoders AUX 1 Assigns Send 1 level to encoders AUX 2 Assigns Send 2 level to encoders AUX 3 Assigns Send 3 level to encoders AUX 4 Assigns Send 4 level to encoders AUX 5 Assigns Send 5 level to encoders AUX 6 Assigns Send 6 level to encoders AUX 7 Assigns Send 7 level to encoders AUX 8 Assigns Send 8 level to encoders SHORTCUTS Section FW 1884 Only The following table outlines the shortcut controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment SAVE F1 Saves the active project The button LED is lit when the project has been edited since the last Save operation REVERT F2 Reverts to the most recently saved version of the project ALL SAFE F3 Disables the Record Enable buttons of all channel strips Chapter 18 Tascam FW 1884 Control Modifier Assignment CLR SOLO F4 Switches Solo off for all channel strips SHIFT Switches Mute off for all channel strips MARKERS F5 Creates a new marker at the current playhead position SHIFT Deletes the marker a
261. p s EQ without leaving this view by simply selecting the channel strip in Logic Pro or by pressing the appropriate SELECT button on the Mackie Control Mackie Control SEND Button Pressing the SEND button activates Send Mixer view Pressing the button repeatedly switches between Send Mixer view and Send Channel view Send Mixer View Send Mixer view allows you to edit one send parameter for all channel strips Destination Level Position or Mute The Send slot number and the parameter being edited are displayed briefly on the LCD when switching to this mode e The mode display shows S1 to S8 indicating the selected Send slot The upper LCD row shows channel strip names Turning the V Pots changes the current send parameter Chapter 3 Mackie Control 77 78 Pressing a V Pot confirms the preselected send destination and sets the other send parameters to their defaults e Cursor Up Cursor Down switches to the next or previous Send slot Cursor Left Cursor Right switches to the next or previous send parameter The selected parameter appears briefly in the upper LCD row e Pressing a MUTE button while holding down the SHIFT button switches the current send s mute status When Flip mode is turned on the MUTE buttons display and edit the current send s mute status Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons Send Channel View Send Channel view allows you to edit all send
262. p menu Input Choose the MIDI input port from the pop up menu Module Shows the name of the control surface e Model Shows the model name of the control surface Version Shows the firmware version for some control surfaces Color Click to choose the color that indicates which tracks are being controlled by this control surface In the Arrange window the tracks controlled by this device are colored along the left edge of the track list if the track control bars are displayed Each control surface must be connected to an independent MIDI In and Out port or corresponding USB FireWire port designated as a MIDI port by the device driver When the device is added the automatic setup or scan procedure sets the appropriate MIDI input and output port settings for the device If the MIDI port settings are incorrect you can manually choose them from the Input and Out Port pop up menus Special Parameters Some control surfaces such as the Mackie Control allow you to define special parameters such as fader touch sensitivity When a device that offers special parameters is connected the Special Parameters area appears on the left side of the Setup window For more information about supported special parameters refer to the documentation for the specific device Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 19 20 Control Surface Group Parameters If you have created one or more control surface groups you can configure gr
263. p overlay labels appear on the C4 displays Press V Select 26 labeled Surrnd Mackie C4 Channel Strip Mixer View Mode In Channel Strip Mixer view the row order is reversed so that the lowest row edits parameter 1 V Pot row 4 bottom row edits the currently chosen channel parameter Row 3 edits channel parameter 2 row 2 edits channel parameter 3 and row 1 at the top edits channel parameter 4 The V Pots edit the following channel parameters in this order volume pan angle input format input assignment output assignment automation mode group displayed automation parameter Chapter 14 Mackie C4 193 194 To edit invisible parameters Press the BANK Left BANK Right or SINGLE Left SINGLE Right buttons to change the parameter shown and edited in row 4 The parameters shown in rows 1 to 3 are adjusted accordingly To access Channel Strip view Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels appear on the C4 displays Press V Select 17 Mackie C4 EQ Mixer View Mode In EQ Mixer view e Row 1 sets the selected EQ band bypass state e Row 2 edits the selected EQ band frequency e Row 3 edits the selected EQ band gain slope e Row 4 edits the selected EQ band Q factor The SLOT UP and SLOT DOWN buttons select the EQ band if a Channel or Linear Phase EQ is inserted in the selected channel strip To access EQ Mixer view Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels appear o
264. pages Dynamics MIDI Instrument Enters Channel view Instrument Edit mode and edits the instrument plug in inserted into the selected Instrument channel Pressing the button repeatedly cycles through all available instrument plug in parameter pages Resolving Issues with Radikal Technologies SAC 2K This section may help you to resolve a few common problems Track or channel names are shorter than necessary and the assignments don t work correctly The SAC 2K is in an Emulation mode Logic Control or HUI for example To resolve this issue turn the SAC 2K power off and then back on The faders don t work and the locator display shows 00000000 You have manually switched the SAC 2K to SLAVE mode This has the unfortunate side effect of not initializing a number of settings required for proper communication To resolve this issue turn the SAC 2K power off and then back on Chapter 15 Radikal Technologies SAC 2K 211 BW N Recording Light 16 The Recording Light control surface plug in enables you to control an external light or sign warning visitors not to enter the recording studio before or during recording Logic Pro sends a MIDI signal to switch on the external device when a track is record enabled or when recording starts Logic Pro sends another MIDI signal to switch off the device when tracks are made record safe or when recording stops Note This control surface plug in requires add
265. parameter to its default value Press the Back key to return to the top level knobset Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport Euphonix Understanding the Controls Available for Each EQ Band This section outlines the addressing and control of EQ bands with the MC Professional and MC Mix devices The first knob of an EQ band the upper or left knob of the pair controls either Frequency or Q To switch between Frequency and Q use the Select SEL key if working with the MC Professional devices or the MC Mix If using the MC Control press the Shift key while touching the knob s image on the touchscreen When active a small yellow LED lights on the upper left of the image Pressing the knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value The second knob of an EQ band the lower or right knob of the pair controls Gain or Slope Pressing the knob top sets the controlled parameter to its default value If working with the MC Professional devices or the MC Mix the On key switches the bypass state of the band On the MC Control press the knob s touchscreen image Euphonix Using the Aux or Sends Configuration Knobset The Aux or Sends Configuration knobset allows you to Edit a send destination Aux or Sends mode Change or set a send destination Aux or Sends Configuration mode The Select key labeled SEL on the MC Mix switches between Pre Fader off unlit and Post Fader on
266. parameters for the selected channel strip The mode display shows SE for send channel strip The upper row of the LCD shows the name of the channel strip the text Sends the page number and total number of pages Page 1 4 for example Control Action V Pot 1 Edits the destination of odd numbered sends V Pot 2 Edits the level of odd numbered sends V Pot 3 Edits the position pre post of odd numbered sends V Pot 4 Sets the mute status of odd numbered sends V Pot 5 Edits the destination of even numbered sends V Pot 6 Edits the level of even numbered sends V Pot 7 Edits the position pre post of even numbered sends V Pot 8 Sets the mute status of even numbered sends The Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons shift between pages The number of sends that can be displayed simultaneously depends on the number of Mackie Control XTs you have Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons Alternate Send Edit Mode Options Holding down the SEND button gives you access to a further submenu in the LCD The mode display shows S_ or S_ depending on whether you are in Send Mixer view or Send Channel view Control Action V Pot 1 or F1 Switches to Send Mixer view and selects destination V Pot 2 or F2 Switches to Send Mixer view and selects send level Chapter 3 Mackie Control Control Action V Pot 3 or F3 Switches to Send Mixer view and select
267. pert view Select the assignment that you want to delete in the Control Parameter list Choose Edit gt Delete or press the Delete key Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 45 46 Getting to Know Zones and Modes You can define a group of controllers as a zone in Expert view and switch all controls in a zone to different parameters all in one operation Using a Mackie Control for example you can define the eight rotary encoders as a zone and switch them between pan send level and plug in parameters You can also define multiple zones for a control surface one for the encoders and a second one that switches the function keys F1 to F8 to different functions Each set of zone parameters is called a mode A zone can contain one or more modes but only one mode can be the active mode at any given time A zone can also contain assignments that are always active regardless of the active mode These are known as modeless assignments The simultaneous use of modal and modeless assignments allows you to do things such as Define a zone that switches between two modes or functions by pressing and releasing a control surface modifier button such as Shift or Option while using a particular function button on the control surface Define a zone that allows you to use modeless assignments for things like updating the display Transport functions and Save and Undo operations The same zone could contain a modal assignmen
268. quivalent to but independent of computer keyboard key Equivalent to but independent of computer keyboard key Equivalent to but independent of computer keyboard key Equivalent to but independent of computer keyboard key 0to9 Normal 1 to 9 recalls markers 1 to 9 If in Go to Marker dialog equivalent to but independent of computer keyboard keys 0 to 9 SHIFT ADD Switches to Mixer view and displays e 1 MIDI channel strips 2 Input channel strips 3 Audio channel strips 4 Instrument channel strips 5 Aux channel strips 6 Bus channel strips 7 Master and output channel strips Chapter 13 Mackie HUI 187 Control Modifier EDIT TOOL Assignment Selects tool if applicable to window with key focus 1 Pointer 2 Pencil 3 Eraser 4 Text tool e 5 Scissors 6 Glue 7 Solo tool e 8 Mute tool 9 Zoom tool If in Go to Marker dialog equivalent to computer keyboard 0 key If notin Go to Marker dialog enters Go to Marker dialog In in Go to Marker dialog equivalent to computer keyboard Period key ENTER If notin Go to Marker dialog enters folder of selected track If in Go to Marker dialog confirms marker number that you entered Mackie HUI Transport Section The following table outlines the transport controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description
269. r more assignments as described in Assigning Controllers to Logic Pro Parameters Mackie Control Connecting Foot Switches You can connect a momentary foot pedal with either positive or negative polarity to the foot switch sockets By default foot switches control the following functions USER SWITCH A is assigned to Start Stop USER SWITCH B is assigned to Record Note that a track must be selected and armed for recording to take place EXTERNAL CONTROL is assigned to the MASTER fader level Only use an expression pedal with this socket The polarity of the foot switches is determined by the Mackie Control when powered up You should first connect the foot switches then turn on the Mackie Control Mackie Control Assignment Overview Each of the following sections outline how Mackie Control interface elements are assigned to Logic functions e Mackie Control Display Buttons e Mackie Control Channel Strip Controls 1 Through 8 e Mackie Control ASSIGNMENT Buttons e Mackie Control Function Key Buttons e Mackie Control GLOBAL VIEW Buttons e Mackie Control MODIFIER Buttons While Held Down e Mackie Control AUTOMATION Buttons e Mackie Control UTILITIES Buttons e Mackie Control TRANSPORT Buttons e Mackie Control Cursor Keys Mackie Control Jog Scrub Wheel Mackie Control External Inputs Mackie Control DISPLAY Buttons The following table outlines the display controls and their functions Chapter 3
270. rameter Track and Slot Buttons Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Setting Up Your Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Assignment Overview Resolving Issues with Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Recording Light Setting Up the Recording Light Changing Recording Light Parameters Roland SI 24 Setting Up Your Roland SI 24 Roland SI 24 Assignment Overview Tascam FW 1884 Setting Up Your Tascam FW 1884 FE 8 and FW 1082 with Logic Pro Contents Chapter 19 Chapter 20 Chapter 21 Chapter 22 Chapter 23 Chapter 24 223 233 233 234 243 243 243 249 249 250 259 259 260 267 267 268 279 279 280 Tascam FW 1884 Assignment Overview Tascam US 2400 Setting Up Your Tascam US 2400 Tascam US 2400 Assignment Overview Tascam US 428 and US 224 Setting Up Your Tascam US 428 or US 224 Tascam US 428 and US 224 Assignment Overview Yamaha 01V96 Setting Up Your Yamaha 01V96 Yamaha 01V96 Assignment Overview Yamaha 02R96 Setting Up Your Yamaha 02R96 Yamaha 02R96 Assignment Overview Yamaha DM1000 Setting Up Your Yamaha DM1000 Yamaha DM1000 Assignment Overview Yamaha DM2000 Setting Up Your Yamaha DM2000 Yamaha DM2000 Assignment Overview Contents An Introduction to Control Surfaces Preface You can use hardware control surfaces to control and automate transport mixing recording and other tasks in Logic Pro All Logic mixer controls such as level and pan can be adjusted on
271. reate options on the LCD assigned to the three rightmost V Pot buttons Once markers have been created press the V Pot button listed below to create or delete a marker at the current playhead position Control Action V Pot 1 to 5 Displays the first five markers by name Pressing a V Pot button moves the playhead to the corresponding marker When the playhead position is inside a marker the lower line displays INSIDE and the V Pot LED ring is lit V Pot 6 Cr w o Creates a marker without rounding to the nearest bar V Pot 7 Create Creates a marker rounded to the nearest bar V Pot 8 Delete Deletes the marker above the current playhead position A recommended workflow for creating or deleting markers is to use the Jog Scrub Wheel Turn the wheel to move the playhead to the desired project position and then press the appropriate V Pot to create or delete a marker For coarse placement use the wheel to move the playhead Chapter 3 Mackie Control For fine placement press the SCRUB button then use the wheel to precisely position the playhead This technique is only appropriate if creating or deleting an unrounded marker For more information about using the Jog Scrub Wheel see Mackie Control Jog Scrub Wheel Zone Large Marker mode is terminated by pressing the MARKER button again Temporary Marker Mode If you want to enter Marker mode temporarily to quickly perform a few marker functions hold down th
272. rface Groups p 16 Configuring Your Control Surface Setup p 18 Setting Control Surfaces Preferences p 26 Modal Dialog Display p 31 Control Surface Usage Tips p 32 Control Surfaces Supported by Logic Pro p 32 About Control Surface Plug ins p 35 About Software and Firmware p 35 Getting Started To use one or more control surfaces with Logic Pro you will need An installed authorized copy of Logic Pro e For USB or FireWire equipped devices such as a Yamaha 01X an available USB or FireWire port Ideally this should be a direct USB FireWire connection with the computer rather than via a USB FireWire hub Refer to the documentation provided by the manufacturer of your control surface 12 e For devices that are only equipped with MIDI ports such as a Mackie Control a MIDI interface with free MIDI input and output ports for each device For example if you re using a MIDI interface with 8 MIDI input ports and 8 MIDI output ports with one Mackie Control and one Mackie Control XT unit you will need to use two of the interface s MIDI In ports and two of its MIDI Out ports An installed driver if required by your control surface that is supported by the operating system you are using on your computer Important Your MIDI interface must feature driver software that supports SysEx communication Consult the documentation that shipped with your MIDI interface or MIDI interface drivers
273. rip are displayed Chapter 5 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport 131 132 If an Insert slot already contains an effect plug in the On key is lit on the MC Professional and MC Mix devices On the MC Control it is indicated by a small green LED in the lower left of the knob image Select the Insert slot you want by pressing the respective knob top Press the Page keys to display Insert slots 9 to 15 The Logic Pro Effect Plug in menu appears Press the Page keys to display ensuing plug ins and to move through the effect plug in hierarchy Choose the effect plug in you want Pressing the knob top enters a submenu or inserts a selected effect plug in Pressing the Back key navigates up one level in the menu hierarchy Euphonix Using the Input Configuration Knobset This knobset behaves differently depending on the channel strip type you are working with audio or software instrument On audio channel strips this knobset allows you to Set a channel strip s input value Input mode Set a channel strip s input format Input Configuration mode On instrument channel strips this knobset allows you to Edit an instrument plug in Input mode Change or insert an instrument plug in Input Configuration mode Setting an Audio Channel Strip s Input Value You set an audio channel strip s input value in Input mode using the Input knobset To set a channel strip s input value Pr
274. rnate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment SHIFT Modifier for function of other controls See SHIFT entries in left column F1 While held down MUTE buttons 1 6 enable disable automation of certain parameters see MUTE SHIFT Enables disables Cycle mode F2 While held down MUTE buttons set automation mode to Read SHIFT Enables disables Autopunch mode F3 While held down MUTE buttons set automation mode to Touch SHIFT Sets left locator by current playhead position F4 While held down MUTE buttons set automation mode to Latch SHIFT Sets right locator by current playhead position F5 While held down MUTE buttons set automation mode to Write Chapter 8 JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk 157 158 Control Modifier Assignment SHIFT Sets punch in locator by current playhead position F6 SHIFT Sets punch out locator by current playhead position F7 Sets pots to Pan Send mode display shows PA SHIFT Enables disables metronome click F8 Sets pots to Instrument Edit mode display shows In F9 Sets pots to Effect Edit mode display shows p1 P9 JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Cursor Section The following table outlines the cursor controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Ass
275. rows The top row row 1 consists of V Pots 1 to 8 Row 2 consists of V Pots 9 to 16 e Row 3 consists of V Pots 17 to 24 191 192 The bottom row row 4 consists of V Pots 25 to 32 Each V Pot features an integrated V Select button which is activated by pressing the V Pot knob top The function or parameter assigned to each V Pot V Select button depends on the current view mode see Mackie C4 View Modes and chosen overlay see Mackie C4 Assignment Buttons V Pots and V Selects 1 to 8 When no overlay is active V Pots 1 to 8 the top row normally perform in the same way as their counterparts on a Mackie Control or Mackie Control XT See Mackie Control Assignment Zone V Pots and V Selects 9 to 32 These V Pots have additional functionality in different view modes In Mixer multi channel views the V Pots in rows 2 3 and 4 usually edit the parameter that follows the parameter edited on row 1 For example in Pan Surround Mixer view row 1 edits the pan surround angle row 2 edits surround diversity row 3 edits LFE level and row 4 edits spread In Channel view all four rows represent a group of 32 editable parameters In Effect and Instrument Edit views the C4 can be split into two groups 8 24 16 16 or 24 8 parameters See SPLIT Button Mackie C4 View Modes The C4 provides a number of view modes that display a particular parameter type on the V Pots V Select buttons See the following sections
276. rows of first C4 unit Split Lower is bottom two rows of first unit and all rows of second C4 unit LED 2 1 is on e 3 5 LED 3 1 is on 4 4 All three LEDs are on 5 3 All three LEDs are on 6 2 All three LEDs are on e 7 1 All three LEDs are on LOCK Button Activates deactivates Track Lock When LOCK is enabled selection of a different track in the Arrange window does not switch the current track channel selection on the C4 SPOT ERASE Button Unassigned Mackie C4 Assignment Buttons The Assignment buttons switch between overlay and normal view modes The parameters assigned to the V Pots V Select buttons change accordingly when an overlay mode is activated MARKER Button Switches between Marker overlay see Mackie C4 Marker Overlay Mode and normal view modes see Mackie C4 View Modes TRACK Button Switches between Track overlay see Mackie C4 Track Overlay Mode and normal view modes see Mackie C4 View Modes Chapter 14 Mackie C4 199 200 You can access alternate Mixer View options by holding down the TRACK button This displays a further submenu in the lower LCD allowing you to view particular channel types e V Select 25 switches to MIDI Channel view V Select 26 switches to Input Channel view e V Select 27 switches to Audio Channel view V Select 28 switches to Software Instrument Channel view V Select 29 switches to Auxiliary Channel view V Select 30 switches
277. rs If you can do without value units the display is less cluttered Note This parameter only applies while you are editing the relevant values Modal Dialog Display All modal dialogs except File Open dialogs appear on the LCD display of control surfaces that feature text displays Examples of modal dialogs include authorization warnings edit confirmations or error messages While a modal dialog is visible you cannot perform actions in any other window The modal dialog text appears in the upper row of the LCD If the dialog text does not fit in the LCD s upper row it starts scrolling after three seconds You can scroll the dialog text manually with the appropriate control See assignment tables in the appropriate chapter Once you start scrolling the text manually automatic scrolling is disabled Ifthe control surface has an Enter or OK button pressing it triggers the dialog s default button where applicable Ifthe control surface has a Cancel or Exit button pressing it triggers the button labeled Cancel or Abort where applicable All buttons in the modal dialog push buttons including Enter Default and Cancel as well as checkboxes and radio buttons but not pop up menus appear in the display s lower row Pressing a control surface button below the display triggers the appropriate function in the dialog if applicable Once you press an Enter or Cancel button on the control surface or click it onscreen the d
278. rs The Learn process opens the Controller Assignments window in Easy view which shows the basic parameters for the current assignment To make assignments other than channel strip or plug in assignments or to edit other assignment parameters you need to switch to Expert view Tip You can only switch back to Easy view if a track or plug in parameter is selected To open the Expert view of the controller assignments window Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Controller Assignments or use Command k and click the Expert View button Zone list Control Parameter list Controller Assignments Zone Mode Control Parameter We Ze gt Wowedes GT Sioal Controler Assignment Parameter Control Surface Logic Ce LED and vertical mete Ch 2 Signal Control Name Ch 4 Signal Global Views LED and horizontal m Ch 3 Signal mae Level Signal LED only CheaSignal e 5 Fle Group none Ea e saan H Controller Assignment Transport V Pot Overla Ch 7 Signal cyde Ch 8 Signal 5 lass Channel stip Parameter area Punch Channel suip Fader arm Cursor Keys eater nommel Ea Input Message 7 moms o o Value Change SS i i Input Message area Touch Release Mina Min Max ol 127 mup 1 00 E Value area Feedback Left toRight ar F Text Feedback I Local Feedback Fader Knob C k
279. rs the following Setting Up Your Yamaha DM2000 p 279 Yamaha DM2000 Assignment Overview p 280 Setting Up Your Yamaha DM2000 Follow the steps below before using your DM2000 with Logic Pro e Make sure that your DM2000 device is connected to the computer via USB Make sure that the latest USB MIDI driver for the device is installed Visit the manufacturer s website to download the most recent driver version if necessary To set up your system with Logic Pro On the DM2000 device a Press the DISPLAY ACCESS SETUP button repeatedly until the Setup gt MIDI Host page is visible b Use the cursor buttons to move to the first DAW parameter box in the SPECIAL FUNCTIONS section and rotate the parameter wheel to select USB and 1 3 c Press the DISPLAY ACCESS REMOTE button and then press the F1 button The Remote 1 page is displayed d Rotate the parameter wheel to choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter e Press the LAYER REMOTE 1 button In Logic Pro When you open Logic Pro the DM2000 device is installed automatically You should see three DM2000 icons in the Setup window aligned horizontally 279 Yamaha DM2000 Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Yamaha DM2000 interface elements to Logic functions Yamaha DM2000 MATRIX SELECT Section Yamaha DM2000 AUX SELECT Section Yamaha DM2000 ENCODER MODE Section Yamaha DM2000 FADER MODE Section Yamaha DM2000 DISPLAY ACCESS
280. rument Edit view where you can edit instrument parameters See Mackie C4 Instrument Edit View Mode for more information The TRACK L and TRACK R buttons shift the fader bank by the number of channel strips in the control surface group Holding down SHIFT and pressing a V Select switches the bypass state of the respective Instrument slot An asterisk precedes the name of bypassed instruments To access Instrument Assign Mixer view Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays Press V Select 22 labeled Instru Mixer Mackie C4 Instrument Edit View Mode In Instrument Edit View V Pots 1 to 32 constitute a group of 32 parameters Splitting is possible see SPLIT Button BANK Left BANK Right shifts the edited parameters by one page In Split mode the BANK button behaviors apply to Split Upper e When holding down SHIFT the BANK button behaviors apply to Split Lower SINGLE Left SINGLE Right shifts the edited parameters by 1 In Split mode the SINGLE button behaviors apply to Split Upper e When holding down SHIFT the SINGLE button behaviors apply to Split Lower To access Instrument Edit view Hold down the CHAN STRIP button The channel strip overlay labels are shown on the C4 displays Press V Select 22 labeled Instru Mixer Insert or select an instrument which will automatically switch the C4 to Instrument Edit view Mackie C4 Cycle View Mode In C
281. s sent in the format chosen in the control surface group s Clock Display parameter Playhead Beats As above but feedback is sent in beats format Playhead Time Code As above but feedback is sent in SMPTE time code format Playhead Beats Scrubbing Moving the controller doesn t set the playhead position but initiates scrubbing The format is defined by the control surface group s Format parameter The controller value defines the scrubbing speed Move Locators Moves left and right locators Left Locator Sets left locator Right Locator Sets right locator Move Punch Locators Moves punch in and punch out locators Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 51 52 Global options Punch In Locator Explanation Sets punch in locator Punch Out Locators Marker Position Sets punch out locator Edits position of current marker Marker Length Edits length of current marker Global options Nudge selected Regions Events Explanation Nudges the selected regions or events by the chosen nudge value See below Any Solo Feedback only On if any track or region Solo button is active Nudge Value Controls the nudge value used for Nudge selected Regions Events Switches between tick division beat bar frame 1 2 frame Scrub Status Sets the scrubbing status for the Playhead parameter beats scrubbing Possible values are set clock audio scrubbing shut
282. s all channel strips to Read automation mode TOUCH SENSE Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Off automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Off USER 5 Sets all channel strips to Off automation mode OVERWRITE FADER Enables disables volume automation playback and recording OVERWRITE PAN OVERWRITE EQ Enables disables pan automation playback and recording Enables disables plug in parameter automation playback and recording OVERWRITE ON Enables disables mute automation playback and recording OVERWRITE AUX Enables disables send level automation playback and recording Yamaha DM2000 LOCATOR Section The following table outlines the LOCATOR controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as USER 4 preassigned to SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment DISPLAY Opens or closes the Marker tab in the Lists area 1to8 Recalls markers 1 to 8 USER 4 Switches the Mixer to the All view displaying all channel strips that exist in your project Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 Control Modifier DISPLAY HISTORY FORWARD A
283. s connected via USB Install the software that comes with the CS 32 Ensure that the CS 32 is in Host mode Make sure that your CS 32 units are connected to the computer via USB USB units are installed automatically when you open Logic Pro To add JLCooper CS 32 control surfaces connected via MIDI Install the software that comes with the CS 32 Ensure that the CS 32 is in Host mode Make sure that your CS 32 units are connected to the computer via MIDI Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup Choose Install in the Setup window s New menu Select the CS 32 from the list in the Install window Click the Scan button JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Assignment Overview Assignments of JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk interface elements to Logic functions are covered in the following sections JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Display 153 154 e JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Pots e JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Channel Strips e JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Bank Button e JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk F Key Section e JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Cursor Section e JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Transport Section JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Jog Wheel Section JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk Display The display shows information on the current mode and parameters being edited Display text Meaning A switching parameter Solo Mute Rec Rdy has been disabled AE Automation Enable setup Mute buttons 1 6 display
284. s only available for key commands key presses and relative value changes If any other assignment class is selected the checkbox is dimmed The default key command assignments support the Key Repeat function if useful or applicable to the control surface or device making changes unnecessary for use of this functionality If you want to enable the Key Repeat function for your own assignments you may need to use the re learn option for the assigned message Key Repeat messages must include the Lo7 byte which provides information on the up released or down pressed state of the assigned button Logic Pro guides you through the re learning process The current MIDI message is automatically cleared Learn mode is activated and a help tag prompts you to send the desired MIDI message Releasing the assigned button after learning the MIDI message automatically creates the Lo7 byte and assigns the Lo7 value for the button release message to the Min parameter The Lo7 value for the button pressed message is automatically assigned to the Max parameter Typically the value range of 1 to 127 is used for the button pressed message The zero 0 value is generally used for the button release message Note Some control surfaces may use different value ranges CM Labs Motormix for example Assigning appropriate Min and Max values ensures that the Key Repeat function will work with such devices This however means that you need to take
285. s position V Pot 4 or F4 Switches to Send Mixer view and selects mute V Pot 5 or F5 Switches to Send Channel view V Pot 6 or F6 Switches to Send Channel Strip 2 view This mode is similar to Send Channel view but parameters are arranged in a slightly different way You can control one parameter for all Send slots used in the selected channel strip The mode display shows SE Send channel strip The upper LCD row shows the name of the channel strip the text Sends the page number and total number of pages V Pots 1 to 8 edit the displayed parameter The horizontal cursor buttons shift between pages The number of parameters that can be displayed simultaneously depends on the number of Mackie Control XTs you have V Pot 7 or F7 Switches to Destination Level Mixer view In this mode you can control one Send slot for all channel strips Each channel strip corresponds to the channel strip name shown in the upper LCD row The mode display shows d1 to d8 indicating the selected send The upper LCD row shows channel strip names The lower LCD row shows the destination of the selected send Turning a V Pot preselects the send destination Pressing a V Pot confirms the preselected send destination The SOLO buttons edit send position a lit SOLO LED indicates Pre Fader mode The MUTE buttons set the send mute status The faders edit the send level V Pot 8 or F8 Switches to Destinatio
286. s the DROP and FAST FWD buttons Punch View Pressing the SHIFT and DROP buttons activates Punch view The mode display shows Pu To return to a regular Assignment mode press one of the Assignment buttons Note Changing a punch locator value with the Mackie Control automatically activates Autopunch mode in Logic Control Action Turning V Pot 1 Shows and edits the current Autopunch status off or on you can also use the DROP button Turning V Pot 3 Move moves the current punch area by a bar with each click of the V Pot Pressing V Pot 5 Picks up the current playhead position for the punch in locator Turning V Pot 5 Changes the punch in locator in bars Turning V Pot 6 Changes the punch in locator in beats denominator steps Pressing V Pot 7 Picks up the current playhead position for the punch out locator Turning V Pot 7 Changes the punch out locator in bars Turning V Pot 8 Changes the punch out locator in beats denominator steps Mackie Control Replace Click and Solo Buttons The REPLACE button activates or deactivates Replace mode The CLICK button activates or deactivates the MIDI or Klopfgeist metronome click There are independent click settings for play and record To access the click settings choose File gt Project Settings gt Metronome Chapter 3 Mackie Control Press the SHIFT and CLICK buttons to activate or deactivate both External Sync mode and transmission of MMC Th
287. screen using your mouse and computer keyboard This is not however an ideal method for precise real time control You can enhance your creative flow and achieve greater flexibility and precision by connecting a hardware control surface to your computer Control surfaces are ideal for creating a dynamic live on stage performance when used with a portable computer MIDI keyboard and audio and MIDI interfaces In the studio you can record control surface automation even when Logic is not in record mode Track automation appears in Logic s Arrange window and in the Piano Roll Editor When you move a fader on the control surface the corresponding fader in Logic s Mixer moves with it EQ or other parameters can be altered by turning rotary knobs on the control surface with assigned parameters updating instantly in Logic As communication between Logic and your control surface is bidirectional adjustments to parameters onscreen are immediately reflected by the corresponding control on the control surface This preface covers the following e What Are Control Surfaces p 7 e About the Logic Pro Documentation p 8 e Additional Resources p 8 What Are Control Surfaces Control surfaces are hardware devices that feature a variety of controls which can include faders rotary knobs buttons and displays Control surfaces typically allow you to select parameters for editing or to select particular tracks channel strips or banks
288. se the NUDGE button In Temporary Nudge mode the cursor buttons emulate the computer keyboard s arrow keys allowing easy selection of a region or event The Nudge value for the REWIND and FAST FWD buttons can also be defined with the function buttons Function button Action F1 Sets Ticks F2 Sets Division F3 Sets Beat F4 Sets Bar F5 Sets Frames F6 Sets Half Frames Chapter 3 Mackie Control BW N Mackie Control CYCLE Button This button activates and deactivates Cycle mode By default the cycle area falls between the first two markers Subsequent markers can act as left and right boundaries for further cycle areas To jump between cycle areas defined by the markers Press the MARKER button Press the CYCLE button and when active as indicated by the LED press the REWIND or FAST FWD button To set the left or right locator to the current playhead position Hold down the CYCLE button and press REWIND or FAST FWD This also activates Cycle mode To quickly define a new cycle area Navigate to the desired left locator position with the Jog Scrub Wheel Press the CYCLE and REWIND buttons Navigate to the desired right locator position with the Jog Scrub Wheel Press the CYCLE and FAST FWD buttons Cycle View Pressing the SHIFT and CYCLE buttons activates Cycle View mode The mode display shows Cy To return to a regular Assignment mode press one of the Assignment buttons Control Acti
289. se while the modifier is held down Chapter 19 Tascam US 2400 239 Control Modifier MTR Assignment Switches encoder LED ring display between two modes The value of the parameter LED off Level peak hold meters LED on In Level Meter mode the LED below the encoder displays signal overloads clipping F KEY Modifier key used to switch the function of other controls see F KEY entries in left column NULL Sets Surround x y or Panning of selected channel to center position LED is on if Surround X or Panning is centered F KEY Resets overload display for level meters Jog Wheel SCRUB off moves playhead by bars SCRUB on scrubbing of audio and MIDI SCRUB flashing Shuttle mode Joystick Edits Surround x y or Panning of selected channel SCRUB Switches Jog Wheel between Move Playhead by Bars LED off and Scrubbing LED on modes SHIFT Sets Jog Wheel to Shuttle mode LED flashes BANK Shifts fader bank to the left by one bank LED is lit if the leftmost fader bank has not been reached F KEY Shifts fader bank to the left by one channel BANK Shifts fader bank to the right by one bank LED is lit if the rightmost fader bank has not been reached F KEY Shifts fader bank to the right by one channel Sets punch in locator at the current playhead position SHIFT Moves playhead to left cycle locator position
290. selected group Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4 enable disable properties of the currently selected group When INSERT PARAM is set to PARAM the left and right Tab Scroll buttons scroll through the group properties When set to INSERT the buttons scroll through the groups for editing USER 4 Switches the Mixer to the Arrange view displaying all channel strips that correspond to tracks used in the Arrange area along with their signal flow The DM2000 channel strips will also reflect the Arrange Channel Strip View mode Enables disables the Group Clutch USER 4 Switches the Mixer to the Arrange view displaying all channel strips that correspond to tracks used in the Arrange area along with their signal flow The DM2000 channel strips will reflect the Tracks Channel Strip View mode Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode see above Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 Control Modifier USER 4 Assignment Switches Mixer to All view displaying all channel strips that exist in your project The DM2000 channel strips will also reflect the All Channel Strip View mode Switches between the Arrange window and the Mixer Shifts channel strips by one channel strip to the left Shifts channel strips by one channel strip to the right While held down all groups are disabled While held down Value Change mode is set to Fine value changes work at maximum resolution
291. sets spread Send Assignment mode Enables disables Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Assignment mode Confirms the plug in selection for Insert slots 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 and enters Plug in Edit mode for the selected Insert slot Plug in Edit mode Sets value to default or switches buttons with two states Moving virtual encoders 1to4 Pan Assignment mode Use cursor keys and then rotate Parameter control 1 edits pan or surround angle parameter wheel Parameter control 2 edits surround diversity Parameter control 3 edits surround LFE Parameter control 4 edits spread Send Assignment mode Controls the Send level of Sends 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Assignment mode Chooses Insert slot 1 to 4 or 5 to 8 Plug in Edit mode Sets value Yamaha 02R96 LCD The LCD displays different data depending on the page selected with the F2 F3 and F4 buttons INSERT ASSIGN EDIT Display mode Parameter details plug in selection or plug in parameters Press F2 to select this mode Channel view mode Encoder values and channel strip display Press F3 to select this mode Level meters view mode Press F4 to select this mode The following assignments are available in all three modes Display Assignment TIME CODE Active if counter is displaying SMPTE time code BEATS Active if counter is displaying bars beats divisions ticks Counter Displays SMPTE time code or bars beats divisions t
292. ss the V Select to insert it V Pot V Select row 3 V Pots 17 to 24 edits Send 1 to 8 Level provided the current channel has active sends e V Pot V Select 25 switches to Instrument Edit mode provided the selected channel is routed to an instrument channel and an instrument plug in is inserted V Pot V Select 26 edits the channel output destination e V Pot V Select 27 sets the automation mode V Pot V Select 28 edits group membership V Pot V Select 29 edits volume Chapter 14 Mackie C4 201 V Pot V Select 30 edits pan surround angle for surround channels V Pot V Select 31 edits surround diversity V Pot V Select 32 sets the channel input format Mackie C4 Function Overlay Mode The Function overlay is active when the FUNCTION button light is on The table below outlines the assignment of C4 controls to Logic functions Control Assignment 1 display Inspct Enables disables the Inspector of the window with key focus 2 Channel Strip Enables disables the Lists area display in the Arrange window 2 Channel Strip Option Enables disables the Media area display in the Arrange window 3 Delay in ms Activates deactivates display of delays in milliseconds 4 Ruler SMPTE Activates deactivates SMPTE display of ruler 5 Global Track Activates deactivates display of Global tracks 6 Arrang Grid Activates deactivates display of the Arrange window grid 7 Event Float Activates d
293. ssignment Selects tool 1 Arrow 2 Pencil 3 Eraser 4 Text tool 5 Scissors 6 Glue tool 7 Solo tool 8 Mute tool PRE Sets the left locator at current playhead position IN Sets the punch in locator at current playhead position OUT Sets the punch out locator at current playhead position POST Sets the right locator at current playhead position RETURN TO ZERO Moves the playhead to the left locator position END Moves the playhead to the right locator position ONLINE Activates or deactivates internal external synchronization QUICK PUNCH Enables disables Autopunch mode Yamaha DM2000 Transport Cursor Section The following table outlines the transport cursor controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as USER 4 preassigned to SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment REW Shuttles backward FF Shuttles forward STOP Stop PLAY Play USER 4 Pause REC Record DISPLAYHISTORY Selects the next tool While held down numerical FORWARD buttons select a specific tool SCRUB Enables disables Scrub mode Chapter 24 Yamaha DM2000 287 Control Modifier Assign
294. t input output and automation mode You must confirm any changes made with the V Pots or DSP V Pots by pressing the corresponding V Select button OUTPUT Assigns channel strip output to V Pots While held down the scribble strips show the current channel strip output assignment The four DSP V Pots control the following parameters of the selected channel strip format input output and automation mode You must confirm any changes made with the V Pots or DSP V Pots by pressing the corresponding V Select button REC RDY ALL Disables Record Enable button of all channel strips BYPASS MUTE Switches the INSERT buttons between Insert Select and Insert Bypass modes See Insert entry in the Mackie HUI Channel Strips table Switches the V Select buttons between Send Position and Send Mute modes SHIFT Chapter 13 Mackie HUI Enables or disables Flip mode 179 180 Control Modifier Assignment SELECT ASSIGN Displays the V Pot assignment as follows Pan Snd1 to Snd8 S1As to S8As In Out SUSPEND DEFAULT Hold this button down to switch the V Select buttons between standard operation and setting default values ASSIGN When V Pots display a send level the ASSIGN button switches them to Send Destination Assignment mode choosing a bus in other words Press the V Select to confirm the assignment The DSP V Pots display the assignments of Send slots 1 4 or Send slots 5 8 Confirm any
295. t a Mackie Control plus two Extender XT units the appropriate setup for the US 2400 in Mackie Control emulation mode when you scan for control surfaces The button layout of the Mackie Control differs from that of the Tascam US 2400 When running the Tascam US 2400 in Mackie Control mode certain controllers are not accessible the Joystick for example Given these restrictions use of the Tascam US 2400 in Mackie Control mode is not recommended If you choose to do so refer to the documentation supplied with the Tascam US 2400 for details Tascam US 2400 Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Tascam US 2400 interface elements to Logic functions e Tascam US 2400 Channel Strips Tascam US 2400 Encoder Details Tascam US 2400 Master Channel Tascam US 2400 Encoder Assignment Section Tascam US 2400 Master Section Tascam US 2400 Channel Strips The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Chapter 19 Tascam US 2400 Control Modifier Encoders Assignment CHAN button on see Tascam US 2400 Encoder Details CHAN button flashing encoders control Instrument parameters Also see Instrument Edit View PAN button flashing encoders control plug in parameters Also see Plug in Edit View Other
296. t for all Volume and Pan controls Switching to another mode would provide access to EQ parameters In both modal situations the display Transport and Save and Undo functions would be available A mode can contain any number of assignments Only the assignments for the active mode are processed by Logic Pro Assignments of inactive modes are ignored You can switch the active mode for a zone by making special assignments See Defining Zones and Modes Zones and modes can be defined across multiple control surfaces to support the use of control surface groups Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments The following example illustrates one possible arrangement of zones and modes and shows how you can define them hierarchically Modeless Assignment A Mode 3 inactive Modeless Assignment B Modal Assignment A Mode 1 inactive Modal Assignment A Modal Assignment B Mode 5 inactive Modal Assignment A Modal Assignment B Modal Assignment C Modal Assignment D Defining Zones and Modes You can only define zones and modes in the Expert view of the Controller Assignments window To define a zone 1 Click the Add button in the lower left corner of the Zone list Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 48 Anew blank zone appears in the Zone list It is highlighted allowing you to immediately rename it Enter a name for the zone If you want to add controllers to the zone see Assigning and Deleting
297. t indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment PLAY transport Play key command SHIFT Switches Select buttons to Transport Section mode STOP locate Stop key command SHIFT Switches Select buttons to Locate mode FFWD monitor Shuttle Forward key command REWIND status Shuttle Rewind key command SHIFT Opens Project Settings Synchronization window NEXT configure Moves playhead to next marker LAST assign When rotary encoders are displaying send destinations use of LAST assign reverts to displaying send levels Otherwise moves playhead to previous marker Chapter 6 CM Labs Motormix Control Modifier SHIFT Assignment When rotary encoders are displaying send levels use of LAST assign switches them to display send destinations When rotary encoders are in Effect Edit mode use of LAST assign switches them to Effect Assign mode When rotary encoders are in Instrument Edit mode use of LAST assign switches them to Instrument Assign Mode ENTER utility Identical to Enter key on computer keyboard SHIFT Opens Project Settings Automation window ESCAPE When LED is lit escapes from special mode denoted by flashing LED At all other times identical to Esc key on computer keyboard Chapter 6 CM Labs Motormix 147 Frontier Design TranzPort T This chapter describes how to use your Frontier Design TranzP
298. t parameter page by one parameter instead of page Mackie Control AUTOMATION Buttons The following table outlines the automation controls and their functions 108 Chapter 3 Mackie Control Mackie Control Modifier Function Comments READ OFF Set selected track s automation to Read or Off OPTION Set all tracks automation to Read or Off TOUCH Set selected track s automation to Touch OPTION Set all tracks automation to Touch LATCH Set selected track s automation to Latch OPTION Set all tracks automation to Latch WRITE Set selected track s automation to Write OPTION Set all tracks automation to Write TRIM Currently unassigned GROUP Enter Group Edit mode SHIFT Create a new group open the Group window and enter Group Edit mode TRACK Switch to Mixer view displaying group parameter OPTION Switch to Single view Mackie Control UTILITIES Buttons The following table outlines the utility controls and their functions Button Modifier Function Comments SAVE Save project OPTION Save project as UNDO Undo SHIFT Redo OPTION Open Undo History CANCEL Leave folder Flashing preselection _ Cancel preselection In alerts Execute Cancel button ENTER Enter folder of selected track In alerts Execute default button Mackie Control TRANSPORT Buttons The following table outlines the transport contr
299. t the control has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment CHAN Switches encoders to Channel view see encoders legend CHAN button LED is lit F KEY Switches encoders to Instrument Edit view CHAN button LED flashes See Instrument Edit View for details PAN Switches encoders to Mixer multichannel view of pan controls PAN button LED is lit F KEY Switches encoders to Plug in Edit view PAN button LED flashes See Plug in Edit View for details AUX 1 Switches encoders to Mixer view of Send 1 level for all channels F KEY Switches display of Arrange window If Arrange window is open it closes If Arrange window is closed it opens AUX 2 Switches encoders to Mixer view of Send 2 level F KEY Switches display of Event List If Event List is open it closes If Event List is closed it opens AUX 3 Switches encoders to Mixer view of Send 3 level F KEY Switches display of Score Editor If Score Editor is open it closes If Score Editor is closed it opens AUX 4 Switches encoders to Mixer view of Send 4 level F KEY Switches display of Audio Bin window If Audio Bin window is open it closes If Audio Bin window is closed it opens AUX 5 Switches encoders to Mixer view of Send 5 level 238 Chapter 19 Tascam US 2400 Control Modifier Assignment F KEY Switches display of Hyper Editor If Hyper Ed
300. t the playhead position LOOP F6 Enables disables Cycle mode CUT Cuts the current selection of regions or events and places it on the Clipboard DEL Deletes the current selection COPY Copies the current selection to the Clipboard PASTE Pastes the Clipboard contents to the current playhead position ALT CMD Modifier for other buttons UNDO Performs an Undo of the last editing operation The button LED is lit when a Redo is possible SHIFT Performs a Redo reverses an Undo operation SHIFT Modifier for other buttons CTRL Modifier for other buttons Channel Strips FW 1884 FE 8 FW 1082 The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description it indicates that the control has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment REC LEDs These LEDs are lit when the corresponding channel strip is recording The LEDs flash when the channel strip is in Record Enable mode armed SEL Selects the channel strip SHIFT Enables disables Send bypass when encoders are controlling a Send level READ Sets the track automation mode to Read WRITE Sets the track automation mode to Write TCH Sets the track automation mode to Touch LATCH Sets the track automation mode to Latch SOLO Enables disables the Solo state of the channel strip Chapter 18 Tascam FW 1884 225 Control Modifier SHIF
301. t to Full Turning the encoder to the right sets the maximum value Turning it to the left sets the minimum value The encoder also stops at its default value Also see description of other buttons Enters Group Edit mode When a channel strip group is selected channel strip membership is indicated by a lit SEL button Use this button to enable disable the channel strip s group membership Virtual encoders 1 to 4 display properties of the currently selected group Virtual encoder buttons 1 to 4 enable disable properties of the currently selected group When INSERT PARAM is set to PARAM the left and right Tab Scroll buttons scroll through the group properties When set to INSERT the buttons scroll through the groups for editing DAW SHIFT ADD Switches the Mixer to the Arrange view displaying all channel strips that correspond to tracks used in the Arrange area along with their signal flow The channel strips on your DM1000 device will also reflect the Arrange Channel Strip View mode DAW SUSPEND GRP Enables disables the Group Clutch DAW SHIFT ADD Switches the Mixer to the Arrange view displaying all channel strips that correspond to tracks used in the Arrange area along with their signal flow The channel strips on your DM1000 device will reflect the Tracks Channel Strip View mode and not the Arrange DAW CREATE GROUP Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode see
302. t with each click of the V Pot when turned e The display shows the punch in and punch out locators above V Pots 5 and 7 Pressing V Select 5 picks up uses the current playhead position for the punch in locator Turning V Pot 5 changes the punch in locator position by bars Turning V Pot 6 changes the punch in locator position by beats denominator steps Pressing V Select 7 picks up uses the current playhead position for the punch out locator Turning V Pot 7 changes the punch out locator position by bars Turning V Pot 8 changes the punch out locator position by beats denominator steps Note Changing a punch locator position with the C4 automatically activates Autopunch mode To activate Punch View mode Hold down the CHAN STRIP button and press V Select 32 Chapter 14 Mackie C4 Mackie C4 Function Buttons This section outlines the FUNCTION buttons at the lower left of the C4 control surface SPLIT Button Splits the C4 rows as follows 4 0 1 3 2 2 and 3 1 This is known as a Split Edit and allows you to simultaneously edit two separate sections of a plug in or even two different plug ins Split Edit is also possible across multiple C4 units For example with two C4 devices pressing the SPLIT button offers the following split modes 1 7 Split Upper is top row of first C4 unit Split Lower is bottom 3 rows of first unit and all rows of second C4 unit LED 1 3 is lit 2 6 Split Upper is top two
303. tches to Instrument Assign mode SHIFT Switches rotary encoders and Multi buttons to Instrument Assign mode WINDOW tools Switches Select buttons to Window Select mode SHIFT Switches Select buttons to Select Tool mode Chapter 6 CM Labs Motormix 145 Control Modifier ALL ALT FINE Assignment While ALL ALT FINE is held down rotary encoders are in Full mode rotating counterclockwise sets minimum rotating clockwise sets maximum value SHIFT DEFAULT bypass While SHIFT and ALL ALT FINE are held down rotary encoders are in Fine mode Parameter changes are made in single unit or smaller values Currently unassigned SHIFT In Instrument Edit mode switches bypass state of the instrument In Effect Edit mode switches bypass state of the effect being edited UNDO save Performs an Undo step The LED is lit if there is a Redo step available SHIFT Saves the project The LED is lit if the project contains unsaved changes SHIFT Switches to Shift mode where the functions indicated by the inverted labels below the buttons apply CM Labs Motormix Faders The faders normally control volume When in Flip mode however they duplicate the rotary encoder assignments CM Labs Motormix Right Function Buttons The following table outlines the right function button controls and their assignments Note If a modifier button such as SHIFT is shown below a button description i
304. ter wheel to select USB and 1 3 c Press the DISPLAY ACCESS REMOTE button and then press the F1 button The Remote 1 page is displayed d Rotate the parameter wheel to choose General DAW as the TARGET parameter e Press the LAYER REMOTE 1 button In Logic Pro When you open Logic Pro the DM1000 device is installed automatically You should see two DM1000 icons in the Setup window aligned horizontally 267 268 Yamaha DM1000 Assignment Overview The following sections outline the assignment of Yamaha DM1000 interface elements to Logic functions Yamaha DM 1000 Yamaha DM 1000 Yamaha DM 1000 Yamaha DM 1000 Yamaha DM 1000 Yamaha DM 1000 Yamaha DM 1000 Yamaha DM 1000 Yamaha DM 1000 Yamaha DM 1000 DISPLAY ACCESS Section AUX SELECT Section ENCODER MODE Section FADER MODE Section Basic LCD Functions LCD Modal Display Functions Data Entry Section Channel Strips Stereo Channel Strip USER DEFINED KEYS Section Yamaha DM1000 DISPLAY ACCESS Section The following table outlines the DISPLAY ACCESS controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT ADD shown below a control description indicates that the control has an alternate function while the modifier is held down Modifier buttons that need to be assigned manually by the user are shown with an asterisk that precedes the button name Control Modifier Assignment AUTOMIX When AUTOMIX is held down in Channel Display mode th
305. term Mackie Control is used for all of these devices throughout the chapter The controls of the Mackie Control are physically grouped into different areas called zones Each zone is clearly labeled and distinguished by different shades of gray on the device The Mackie Control features and functions described in the following sections are organized by these zones This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Mackie Control in Logic Pro p 64 Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Mackie Control Display Zone p 64 Channel Strip Controls p 67 Assignment Zone p 70 Fader Bank Zone p 84 Mackie Control Function Key Zone p 87 Global View Zone p 88 Modifier Buttons p 89 Automation Buttons p 89 Utilities Buttons p 91 Transport Zone p 92 Cursor Key Zone p 99 Jog Scrub Wheel Zone p 100 Programmable User Modes p 100 Connecting Foot Switches p 101 Assignment Overview p 101 63 64 Setting Up Your Mackie Control in Logic Pro When you open Logic Pro it automatically detects any powered Mackie Control unit that is connected to your system You can use the Mackie Control immediately with the default settings or you can customize its settings as described in Basic Control
306. the V Pot buttons The Cursor Up and Cursor Down buttons select the previous or next group The Cursor Left and Cursor Right buttons shift the group parameter display The SELECT buttons determine group membership Pressing a SELECT button adds the channel strip to the group or removes it from the group if already a member An illuminated SELECT button LED indicates active group membership The LED next to the GROUP button is illuminated Note Ensure that the ZOOM button isn t active when using the cursor buttons Chapter 3 Mackie Control If Group Edit mode is off holding down the GROUP button and pressing one or more SELECT buttons allows you to create a new group Pressing the GROUP button while holding down the SHIFT button creates a new group opens the Group window and activates Group Edit mode Pressing the GROUP button while holding down the TRACK button switches to Mixer view with the channel strip group parameter shown It displays the group that the selected channel strip belongs to Multiple group membership is displayed as in the Mixer window Turning a V Pot changes group membership Note You can only select one group or Off with this function Mackie Control Utilities Buttons The four Utilities buttons activate common Logic Pro functions Save Undo Cancel and Enter SAVE Button Press the SAVE button to save the current project file The first time you save a project a Save dialog appears on
307. the first send of the channel Encoder 7 Controls the send level for the second send of the channel Encoder 8 Controls the Volume fader of the channel Generator Button If the selected channel strip is an instrument channel strip pressing the Generator button assigns the rotary encoders to edit the sound generation parameters of the instrument These assignments are in groups of eight parameters The Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons switch to the previous or next page of eight parameters Activation of the Generator button has no effect if the selected channel strip is not a software instrument channel strip Effect 1 and Effect 2 Buttons Pressing Effect 1 assigns the rotary encoders to edit the parameters of the third Insert slot of the selected channel strip Pressing Effect 2 assigns the rotary encoders to edit the parameters of the fourth Insert slot if a fourth Insert slot exists The Arrow Up and Arrow Down buttons switch to the previous or next page of parameters Pressing the Effect 1 or Effect 2 button while holding down the Option button switches the bypass status of Insert slots 3 and 4 respectively When using the Arrow buttons to switch between parameter pages accessed through use of the Generator Effect 1 or Effect 2 button the parameters change in groups of eight unless the parameters on the last page do not make a complete group of eight For example if a plug in has 19 parameters and the iControl is control
308. these might normally be assigned to audio channel strips 1 8 in Logic Pro If you set this parameter to 2 the device channel strips would control Logic Pro Mixer channel strips 3 10 1 2 3 Fader Bank for All View Drag vertically or enter an integer value to offset which Logic Pro channel strips are controlled by the device in All view This parameter is only available when multiple channel strip types are displayed in the Mixer When single channel strip types are displayed there are separate fader bank parameters These aren t displayed in the parameter list Channel Strip Parameter Choose which function is controlled by the channel strip encoders on the device The choices are Volume Encoders adjust channel volume e Pan Encoders adjust channel panorama position Format Encoders adjust select channel format Input Encoders adjust select channel input source Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup Output Encoders adjust select channel output main outs auxes surround Automation Encoders adjust select channel automation mode Group Encoders adjust group membership of the track Editing the parameter allows you to set either no group or a single group Enabling membership of multiple groups is not possible This can only be done directly in the Logic Pro Mixer Displayed Par Encoders adjust the automation parameter selected in the Arrange window This is especially useful if you set
309. ting any update Note Some control surfaces may require that you physically replace the chip for firmware updates Contact the manufacturer of your device for details Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 35 Customizing Controller 2 Assignments You can assign controllers to Logic Pro parameters and edit controller assignments to fit your workflow This section explains how to assign controllers to Logic parameters edit controller assignments and use zones and modes to switch between groups of assignments This chapter covers the following e Assigning Controllers to Logic Pro Parameters p 37 Controller Assignments Working in Easy View p 38 e Controller Assigments Working in Expert View p 41 e Assigning Buttons to Key Commands p 59 Controller Assignments Storage p 61 Assigning Controllers to Logic Pro Parameters You can assign any controller that is capable of generating a MIDI message to a parameter in Logic Pro Assigning controllers to Logic parameters lets you use faders knobs switches and other controllers to remotely control Logic functions These can be used as is or in conjunction with modifier keys Most supported control surfaces include preset controller assignments that become active when you add the device to your system You can change existing assignments for supported control surfaces and create new assignments for both supported and unsupported devices For example the de
310. tion mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Latch DAW AUTO LATCH Sets all channel strips to Latch automation mode DAW OPTION ALL Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Read automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Read DAW AUTO READ Sets all channel strips to Read automation mode DAW OPTION ALL Sets all channel strips to Write automation mode DAW AUTO OFF Sets selected channel strip or channel strip group to Off automation mode While held down and with the STEREO channel strip AUTO button enabled sets automation mode to Off DAW OPTION ALL Sets all channel strips to Off automation mode DAW AUTO STATUS While held down in Channel Display mode the display shows the automation mode of the 16 channel strips in the current bank selection Chapter 21 Yamaha 01V96 Yamaha 02R96 22 This chapter describes how to use your Yamaha 02R96 with Logic Pro This chapter covers the following Setting Up Your Yamaha 02R96 p 259 e Yamaha 02R96 Assignment Overview p 260 Setting Up Your Yamaha 02R96 Follow the steps below before using your 02R96 with Logic Pro e Make sure that your 02R96 device is connected to the computer via USB Make sure that the latest USB MIDI driver for the device is installed Visit t
311. tle Automation of all tracks Switches the automation status of all tracks between the following values Off Read Touch Latch Write Alert Text Alert Button Alert Icon Used by plug ins to define special Alert mode This is mainly of use to control surface developers Dummy Used to temporarily disable a modeless assignment by using the Exclusive checkbox See Control Name Field Cycle Toggles the Cycle function on and off Autopunch Toggles the Autopunch function on and off Go to Marker Allows you to move the playhead to a marker number An additional number field below the Parameter pop up menu is used to determine the destination marker number Group Clutch Sets the automation group clutch automation groups are disabled when the clutch is enabled For buttons sets the group clutch to 1 when the button is pressed and sets it to 0 when the button is released Active Sense Used by some control surfaces such as the HUI to process incoming Active Sensing messages Shuttle Speed Sets the shuttle forward and backward speed directly Use this for controllers usually knobs that send an absolute rather than relative value Waveform Zoom Sets the waveform zoom level in the key focus Arrange area Quantize value Sets the Quantize value in the key focus window if this parameter is available Division Sets the Division value in the key focus window if this param
312. to Bus Channel view V Select 31 switches to Output Channel view e V Select 32 switches to Master Channel view Releasing the TRACK button without pressing a V Select returns you to Mixer view CHAN STRIP Button Switches between Channel a ae see Mackie C4 Channel Strip Overlay Mode and normal view modes see Mackie C4 View Mo i You can access alternate User View options by holding down the CHAN STRIP button which displays a further submenu in the lower LCD V Select 9 to 16 switches to one of eight user modes where you can freely assign parameters to V Pots or V Select buttons V Select 17 switches to Channel Strip Mixer view e V Select 18 switches to Pan Surround Mixer view V Select 19 switches to EQ Mixer view e V Select 20 switches to Send Mixer view V Select 21 switches to Effect Assign Mixer view V Select 22 switches to Instrument Select Mixer view e V Select 26 switches to Pan Surround Channel view V Select 27 switches to EQ Channel view e V Select 28 switches to Send Channel view V Select 31 activates the Cycle view V Select 32 activates the Drop view FUNCTION Button Sven between Function overlay and normal view modes see Mackie C4 View Modes See Mackie C4 Function Overlay Mode for details on this mode Chapter 14 Mackie C4 Mackie C4 Marker Overlay Mode The Marker overlay is active when the MARKER button light is on V Selects 1 to 30 are assigned to markers 1 to 30
313. ton Pressing the Pan button assigns the rotary encoders to control the pan balance of the eight active channels The channel strip button functionality is as per their defaults Track Info Button Pressing the Track Info button activates Channel Strip Channel view In this mode you can use the Select Sel buttons and rotary encoders to edit global parameters of the selected channel strip The Record Enable Mute and Solo buttons retain their default functions Sel button 1 to 5 Switches the bypass status of the first five Insert slots Sel button 6 and 7 Switches the bypass status of the first and second Send slots Sel button 8 Not assigned In Channel Strip Channel view each of the Select buttons is lit when the respective Insert or Send slot is enabled and unlit when the slot is bypassed e Encoder 1 If the selected channel is an audio channel strip with a Noise Gate effect controls the Threshold parameter of the Noise Gate if inserted in the selected channel strip Encoder 2 If the selected channel is an audio channel strip with a Compressor effect controls the Compressor s Ratio Chapter 4 M Audio iControl Note The assignments for Encoder 1 and 2 are optimized for GarageBand Real Instrument tracks which have a default Noise Gate and Compressor effect inserted Encoder 3 Not assigned Encoder 4 Not assigned Encoder 5 Controls the Pan knob of the channel Encoder 6 Controls the send level for
314. ton remains active so you can still move a controller to send a MIDI message In this situation be sure to click the Learn Mode button when you are finished to end the Learn process Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 39 To delete a controller assignment in Easy view Select the assignment you want to remove in the Controller Assignments window Easy view and click the Delete button Assigning a Series of Controllers in Easy View Logic Pro includes a shortcut that makes it easy to assign a series of controllers to a series of similar parameters For example you can use this shortcut to assign a series of faders to volume to assign a series of knobs to other channel strip parameters such as pan solo or mute or to assign a series of controllers to a set of plug in parameters To assign a series of controllers to a series of parameters In the Mixer or in any plug in window select the parameter that you want Logic Pro to learn as a controller assignment Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Learn Assignment for parameter name Alternately you can use the Learn new Controller Assignment key command default Command L to open the Controller Assignments window and activate Learn mode The Controller Assignments window opens in Easy view with the Learn Mode button activated In most cases the name of the selected parameter is shown in the Parameter field Assign the first controller in the seri
315. tons enable disable group membership of the channel SHIFT ADD Switches to Channel view CREATE Creates a new group and enters Group Edit mode see above SHIFT ADD Switches to Mixer view SUSPEND Activates or deactivates the Group Clutch SHIFT ADD Switches to Tracks view Mackie HUI EDIT Section The following table outlines the editing controls and their assignments Control Assignment CAPTURE SEPARATE CUT Cuts the selection of regions or events COPY Copies the selection PASTE Pastes the Clipboard contents DELETE Deletes the selection Mackie HUI Time Display The following table outlines the time display controls and their assignments Control Assignment TIME CODE Lit if counter is displaying SMPTE time code Chapter 13 Mackie HUI Control Assignment FEET Not assigned BEATS Lit if counter is displaying bars beats divisions ticks Time display Switches between a SMPTE time code or bars beats divisions ticks display RUDE SOLO LIGHT Flashes if any channel is soloed Mackie HUI LOCATE NUMERICS Section The following table outlines the numeric keypad controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment CLR Deletes current marker Creates a marker at the current playhead position if E
316. tor position M Audio iControl Transport Controls and Functions The following table outlines the transport controls and their functions iControl Modifier Function Comments Record Record Return to Zero Go to beginning of project Rewind Moves the playhead one bar backward If held continue to scroll backward Cycle Engages Cycle function and sets left locator to playhead position Play Play or Stop Fast Forward Moves the playhead one bar forward If held continue to scroll forward Cycle Engages Cycle function and sets right locator to playhead position Cycle Switches Cycle mode on or off Chapter 4 M Audio iControl 123 Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC 5 MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport Logic Pro supports the EuCon protocol developed by Euphonix This protocol allows enhanced communication between the MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix or MC Transport and Logic Pro Keep in mind the following when reading through the chapter The term Euphonix device is used when describing all devices as a group MC Professional device is used when speaking about the MC Pro and System 5 MC MC Artist device is used when speaking about the MC Mix MC Transport and MC Control For any exceptions to the above individual device names are used Note This is an addendum to the Euphonix user documentation and is limited to descriptions of features specific to Logic Pro Refer to t
317. triangle to reveal the commands for a category then select the key command you want to assign or use the Search field Press and hold down the control surface button or key that you want to assign to the key command Click the Learn New Assignment button Release the button or key The name of the button or key appears in the Assignments field When you finish click the Close button to exit the window Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments To delete a key command assignment In the Key Commands window select the key command with an assignment that you want to delete in the Command list Select the assignment for the key command in the Assignments field Press the Delete key Controller Assignments Storage The current controller assignments and all Control Surfaces preferences are stored in the Library Preferences com apple logic pro cs file You do not need to explicitly save controller assignments or related preferences and settings These are automatically stored in the location mentioned above when you quit Logic Pro Chapter 2 Customizing Controller Assignments 61 Mackie Control You can fully control Logic Pro with a Mackie Control and can extend its functionality with several expansion devices such as the XT and C4 units The information in this chapter applies to the Mackie Control Universal the original Mackie Control the Logic Control and the Mackie or Logic Control Extender XT The
318. trument parameter 11 Bypasses the instrument plug in 12 Shifts Instrument parameter page CH SELECT 1 to 12 SHIFT In EQ Send mode 2 4 6 8 Control the Q Factor of EQ bands 1 4 9 12 Determine Send 1 4 destinations Selects track channel STATUS 1 to 12 In Automation mode Switches Automation mode between Off LED off Read green Latch orange e Write red In Record Ready mode Activates deactivates Record Enable In Solo mode Enables disables Solo In Mute mode Enables disables Mute Chapter 17 Roland Sl 24 217 Control Modifier Assignment Fader 1 to 12 Controls volume Roland SI 24 STATUS MODE Section The following table outlines the status mode controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT shown below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment AUTOMIX Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to Automation mode SHIFT Sets all tracks to Off Read Latch or Write automation mode Repeatedly press this button combination to cycle through automation modes REC PLAY Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to Record Enable mode SOLO Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to Solo mode MUTE Sets STATUS 1 to 12 buttons to Mute mode Roland SI 24 CH ASSIGN Controls The following table outlines the channel assign controls and their assignments Note A modi
319. tton lets you rewind through your project Pressing the REWIND button repeatedly while rewinding accelerates the rewind speed Pressing the FAST FWD button repeatedly while rewinding slows down stops and eventually reverses the shuttle direction Pressing the STOP button halts the rewind process at the current playhead position Turning the Jog Scrub Wheel also exits rewind shuttle mode When one of the Marker modes is activated pressing the REWIND button moves the playhead to the previous marker When one of the Nudge modes is activated the REWIND button moves the selected regions or events backward by the value defined in Large Nudge mode Chapter 3 Mackie Control Mackie Control FAST FWD Button The FAST FWD button lets you fast forward through your project Pressing FAST FWD repeatedly while fast forwarding accelerates the shuttle speed Pressing the REWIND button repeatedly while fast forwarding slows down stops and eventually reverses the shuttle direction Pressing the STOP button halts the fast forward process Turning the Jog Scrub Wheel also exits forward shuttle mode When one of the Marker modes is active pressing the FAST FWD button moves the playhead to the next marker When one of the Nudge modes is active pressing the FAST FWD button moves the selected regions or events forward by the value defined in Large Nudge mode Tip You can combine markers with cycle areas by pressing the respective buttons on the Mackie Contr
320. ulates three HUI units using three virtual MIDI In and Out connections over its USB cable See Yamaha 02R96 The Baby HUI is a stripped down version of the HUI See Mackie Baby HUI C4 Mackie CM408T System 5 MC Euphonix The Mackie C4 is directly supported See Mackie C4 See Euphonix MC Pro System 5 MC MC Control MC Mix and MC Transport CS 32 MiniDesk JLCooper See JLCooper CS 32 MiniDesk DM1000 Yamaha The Yamaha DM1000 emulates two HUI units using two virtual MIDI In and Out connections over its USB cable See Yamaha DM1000 DM2000 Yamaha The Yamaha DM2000 emulates three HUI units using three virtual MIDI In and Out connections over its USB cable See Yamaha DM2000 FaderMaster 4 100 JLCooper See JLCooper FaderMaster 4 100 FE 8 Tascam Extension unit for FW 1884 See Tascam FW 1884 FW 1082 Tascam A stripped down version of the FW 1884 See Tascam FW 1884 FW 1884 Tascam See Tascam FW 1884 HUI Mackie See Mackie HUI iControl M Audio See M Audio iControl KONTROL49 Korg A larger version of the microKONTROL See Korg microKONTROL and KONTROL49 Logic Control XT Mackie Emagic This is the extension unit for the Logic Control It only offers the channel strip section making it less useful without a Logic or Mackie Control See Mackie Control Logic Mackie Control Mackie Emagic See Mackie Control for more details Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup 33 34
321. um to the Tascam user documentation and is limited to descriptions of features specific to Logic Pro Refer to the Tascam documentation for more information about the individual control surfaces This chapter covers the following e Setting Up Your Tascam FW 1884 FE 8 and FW 1082 with Logic Pro p 223 Tascam FW 1884 Assignment Overview p 223 Setting Up Your Tascam FW 1884 FE 8 and FW 1082 with Logic Pro Follow the steps below to use your device with Logic Pro To set up your device with Logic Pro Set up your device as described in the Tascam user documentation Install the latest Mac OS X driver software and firmware on your computer Visit the Tascam website to download the most recent versions if necessary Open Logic Pro Your control surface automatically connects to the application Tascam FW 1884 Assignment Overview Assignments of Tascam FW 1884 interface elements to Logic functions are covered in the following sections Note The relevant devices are highlighted in the heading of each section e ENCODERS Section FW 1884 FE 8 223 224 SHORTCUTS Section FW 1884 Only e Channel Strips FW 1884 FE 8 FW 1082 EQ Section FW 1884 Only Encoders and Controls Section FW 1082 Only e MASTER Fader FW 1884 FE 8 FW 1082 e Automation Clock Rate Section FW 1884 Only Mode Controls Section FW 1082 Only e Master Section FW 1884 FE 8 FW 1082 ENCODERS Section FW 1884 FE 8 The foll
322. urrent playhead position SHIFT Moves the playhead to the right locator position Recall Marker Opens the Go to Marker dialog SHIFT Opens the Marker List Jog Wheel Moves the playhead in one of three modes depending on the state of the Scrub button see above Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Transport Section The following table outlines the transport controls and their assignments Note A modifier button such as SHIFT below a button description indicates that the button has an alternate function or use while the modifier is held down Control Modifier Assignment lt lt Shuttles backward gt gt Shuttles forward SHIFT Goes to next marker STOP Stops playback or recording Chapter 15 Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Control Modifier Assignment PLAY Starts playback SHIFT Enables disables Cycle mode RECORD Starts recording to record enabled tracks SHIFT Enables disables Replace mode Radikal Technologies SAC 2K Channel Edit Mode The following table outlines the channel strip controls and their assignments Control Assignment EQs Enters Channel view EQ Edit mode Pressing the button repeatedly cycles through all available EQ parameter pages Inserts Sends Enters Channel view Plug in Edit mode and edits the effect plug in inserted into the currently chosen Insert slot of the selected channel Pressing the button repeatedly cycles through all available effect plug in parameter
323. usted in coarse steps Full Turning the encoder to the right sets the maximum value Turning it to the left sets the minimum value The encoder also stops at its default value For example when the Pan knob is left of center turning the encoder to the right initially sets the Pan parameter to center its default value A further turn to the right sets the Pan to full right its maximum value Fine The parameter is incremented or decremented in fine steps by one tick or other unit In this mode the highest possible resolution is used For example when editing the Sample Delay plug in s Delay parameter every encoder tick increases or decreases the value by 1 sample regardless of the resolution value e Mix Group Determines which group is edited when in Group Edit mode Group Parameter Page Defines which parameter of the edited group is assigned to the leftmost encoder Setting Control Surfaces Preferences Various settings that affect the onscreen appearance and performance of control surfaces can be made in the Logic Pro Control Surfaces preferences To open the Control Surfaces preferences Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Preferences or use the Open Control Surfaces Preferences key command Chapter 1 Basic Control Surface Setup To temporarily disable your control surfaces Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Bypass all Control Surfaces This command is useful for s
324. vertical bar which shows the channel level The text characters reappear when the level meter is not visible Horizontal with Peak Hold In this mode the lower row of the LCD is replaced by horizontal channel level bars Peak Hold appears as a hollow box which disappears after a few seconds Signal overloads clipping are indicated by an asterisk which remains on the LCD display until cleared see below Off In this mode no level meter bars are displayed in the main LCD In all three modes the SIGNAL LEDs of the channel strips function as per usual indicating the presence of a signal Pressing the NAME VALUE button while holding down the CONTROL button clears any overload clipping indicators in the Logic Pro Mixer and in the LCD of the Mackie Control if the Horizontal with Peak Hold mode is active Pressing the NAME VALUE button while holding down the CMD ALT or OPTION button activates Control Surface Group Settings mode This mode lets you edit the following control surface group settings some of which are not accessible with a single button Control Action V POT 5 Sets the track name display format Name Displays the track name only No Name Displays the track number and name V POT 6 Switches Channel view to Lock mode Off The standard mode where selecting a channel strip makes it the active currently being edited channel strip On Locks the active channel strip Selection of another
325. ves the playhead Scrub mode on The Jog Scrub Wheel performs scrubbing which allows you to hear the data of the selected or soloed tracks while scrolling or moving through the project Audio tracks are normally played back at their original speed If you would rather hear them at double speed choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Audio gt Drivers and set Maximum Scrub Speed to Double in the pop up menu Note You can also use the SCRUB button for Pause functionality SHUTTLE mode The Jog Scrub Wheel shuttles the playhead turning it increases or decreases the speed at which the playhead moves The SCRUB button LED flashes when in Shuttle mode Mackie Control Programmable User Modes The Mackie Control provides six programmable user modes which you can use for your own assignments You can activate each of these modes by holding down the SHIFT button along with one of the Assignment buttons as follows e TRACK SHIFT User mode 1 PAN SURROUND SHIFT User mode 2 EQ SHIFT User mode 3 SEND SHIFT User mode 4 PLUG IN SHIFT User mode 5 INSTRUMENT SHIFT User mode 6 The Assignment displays shows the users modes as u1 u2 and so on Chapter 3 Mackie Control To create an assignment in one of the user modes Activate the user mode you want to use by holding down the SHIFT button and pressing one of the Assignment buttons as listed above In Logic Pro use the Learn process to create one o
326. vice requires the installation of two applications one for the MC Pro device EUConMC software and a second for the computer EuConWS client Full details are in the Euphonix user documentation Open Logic Pro The startup screen lets you know that Logic Pro is starting EuCon On the MC Pro press the workstation button associated with your computer The MC Pro display shows an Attaching to Logic Pro progress bar To set up your MC Artist device for use with Logic Pro Set up your device as described in the Euphonix user documentation Install the latest EuCon software on your computer If necessary go to the Euphonix website to download the most recent software version With the EuControl application running on your computer open Logic Pro Your MC Artist device will automatically connect to the application Euphonix Changing the Track Display By default tracks are shown in the Mixer and on the display of your Euphonix device according to the Mixer s Arrange View mode This means that all channel strips with corresponding Arrange window tracks are displayed in the same order as in the Arrange area Note Redundant tracks where multiple tracks are routed to the same channel strip are not accessible Switching the Mixer view to another mode using the view buttons or channel strip filter buttons does not update the Euphonix device display You can however override the default behavior To switch the view of channe
327. with a USB cable Also ensure that the unit is powered Open Logic Pro and the MCS3 will be added to the Control Surfaces Setup window To add JLCooper MCS3 control surfaces connected via MIDI Make sure that your MCS3 units are connected to the computer via MIDI Choose Logic Pro gt Preferences gt Control Surfaces gt Setup Choose Install in the Setup window s New menu Select the MCS3 from the list in the Install window Click the Scan button JLCooper MCS3 Assignment Overview Assignments of JLCooper MCS3 interface elements to Logic functions are covered in the following sections e JLCooper MCS3 F1 to F6 Buttons e JLCooper MCS3 W1 to W7 Buttons 163 164 e JLCooper MCS3 Cursor Controls e JLCooper MCS3 Jog Wheel and Shuttle Ring e JLCooper MCS3 Transport Controls JLCooper MCS3 F1 to F6 Buttons The following table outlines the F1 to F6 buttons and their assignments Control Assignment F1 Switches to Layer 1 F2 Switches to Layer 2 F3 Switches to Layer 3 F4 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key commands in Layers 1 2 and 3 F5 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key commands in Layers 1 2 and 3 F6 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key commands in Layers 1 2 and 3 JLCooper MCS3 W1 to W7 Buttons The following table outlines the W1 to W7 buttons and their assignments Control Assignment w1 Unassigned Can be assigned to different key co
328. y below it Depending on the parameters you are editing and whether Mixer view or Channel view is active the information displayed on the main LCD changes In general the upper row of each section displays the abbreviated track or channel name and the lower row displays the abbreviated parameter name and its value Chapter 3 Mackie Control In some modes a long parameter name or other text appears briefly onscreen while you are moving the corresponding control You can set the display and duration of long parameter names in the Control Surfaces preferences For information on setting preferences see Basic Control Surface Setup Note On the LCD 8 bit ASCII characters such as curly quotes and umlauts are replaced with the best possible 7 bit ASCII equivalent Mackie Control Assignment Display The Assignment display also referred to as the mode display to the right of the main LCD shows a two digit abbreviation for the current assignment status A period appears at the bottom right corner of the display when Channel view is active Mackie Control Time Display The Time display to the right of the Assignment display shows the current playhead position either in musical time divisions BEATS or in SMPTE time code format SMPTE A small LED to the left of the display indicates the current display format When the format is set to Beats the four segments of the Time display show the current playhead position as bars be
329. y command in the Command field which appears below the Class pop up menu Some key commands provide on off or enabled disabled feedback If you want your key command assignment to be executed repeatedly select the Key Repeat checkbox at the bottom of the Controller Assignments window For further information see Key Repeat Checkbox in Editing Value Parameters in Expert View Click the Show button to open the Key Commands window The key command shown in the Command field is automatically selected and shown in the Key Commands window Control Surface Group Choosing the Control Surface Group class allows you to set a property for the control surface group that the assignment belongs to When you choose this class a Parameter pop up menu appears below the Class pop up menu This pop up menu allows you to choose one of the options described in Control Surface Group Parameters or one from those listed in the following table Note that assignments for unsupported control surfaces always belong to the first control surface group Parameter option Additional info Fader Bank for Current View Maps to the fader bank for the currently used View mode This way you need only one assignment per left right button for all View modes Filter for All View When this parameter is selected eight additional checkboxes for the eight channel strip types are displayed when the View mode is All Depending on the Value mode these switches define
330. ycle View mode the V Pots V Selects behave as follows V Pot V Select 1 labeled Cycle shows and edits the current Cycle mode status off or on V Select 2 labeled BySet matches the cycle area to selections made in the Arrange window selected audio or MIDI regions Chapter 14 Mackie C4 197 198 V Pot 3 labeled Move moves the current cycle area by a bar with each click of the V Pot when turned V Pot 4 moves the current cycle area by a beat with each click of the V Pot when turned The display shows the left and right locators above V Pots 5 and 7 e Pressing V Select 5 picks up uses the current playhead position for the left locator Turning V Pot 5 changes the left locator position by bars Turning V Pot 6 changes the left locator position by beats denominator steps e Pressing V Select 7 picks up uses the current playhead position for the right locator Turning V Pot 7 changes the right locator position by bars Turning V Pot 8 changes the right locator position by beats denominator steps To activate Cycle View mode Hold down the CHAN STRIP button and press V Select 31 Mackie C4 Punch View Mode In Punch View mode the V Pots V Selects behave as follows V Pot V Select 1 shows and edits the current Autopunch status off or on V Pot 3 labeled Move moves the current punch in locator by a bar with each click of the V Pot when turned V Pot 4 moves the current punch in locator by a bea

Logic Pro 9 Control Surfaces Support

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents